Engine Control System: Section

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
B ENGINE

SECTION EC EC
E
CONTENTS
VQ35DE POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................. 51 F
Description .............................................................. 51
INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 15 Component Inspection ............................................ 51
DTC No. Index ....................................................... 15 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM- G
Alphabetical Index .................................................. 19 NATS) ........................................................................ 53
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 23 Description .............................................................. 53
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 54
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- H
Introduction ............................................................. 54
SIONER” ................................................................ 23 Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 54
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and Emission-Related Diagnostic Information ............... 55
A/T .......................................................................... 23 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 68 I
Precaution .............................................................. 23 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 72
PREPARATION ......................................................... 27 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................... 77
Special Service Tools ............................................. 27 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 77 J
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 29 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 82
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 30 VIN Registration ..................................................... 83
System Diagram ..................................................... 30 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 84
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 31 K
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................. 84
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 33 Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 84
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 86
Speed) .................................................................... 34 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 88 L
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ..................... 35 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 88
Input/Output Signal Chart ....................................... 35 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 94
System Description ................................................ 35 Fail-Safe Chart ....................................................... 96 M
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 36 Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 97
System Description ................................................ 36 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 101
Component Description .......................................... 37 Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 107
CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 38 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 108
System Description ................................................ 38 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 110
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 39 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 110
Description ............................................................. 39 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 119
Component Inspection ........................................... 42 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 130
Removal and Installation ........................................ 43 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 133
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ....................... 43 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY Mode ..................................................................... 136
(ORVR) ...................................................................... 46 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 138
System Description ................................................ 46 Description ............................................................ 138
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 47 Testing Condition .................................................. 138
Component Inspection ........................................... 49 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 138
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 139
Revision: 2006 December EC-1 2006 FX35/FX45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- Component Inspection .......................................... 187
DENT ....................................................................... 148 Removal and Installation ....................................... 187
Description ............................................................ 148 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 188
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 148 Component Description ........................................ 188
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 149 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 149 .188
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 150 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188
Ground Inspection ................................................ 154 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 189
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 156 Overall Function Check ......................................... 190
Description ............................................................ 156 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 191
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 156 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 192
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 156 Component Inspection .......................................... 195
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 157 Removal and Installation ....................................... 196
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 158 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 197
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................... 159 Component Description ........................................ 197
Description ............................................................ 159 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159 .197
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 159 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 197
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 160 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 198
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ........................ 161 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 199
Description ............................................................ 161 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 200
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection .......................................... 203
. 161 Removal and Installation ....................................... 204
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 162 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 205
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 162 Component Description ........................................ 205
Component Inspection .......................................... 164 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 205
Removal and Installation ...................................... 164 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 207
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 208
HEATER .................................................................. 165 Component Inspection .......................................... 209
Description ............................................................ 165 Removal and Installation ....................................... 209
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 210
. 165 Component Description ........................................ 210
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 165 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 210
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 165 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 211
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 167 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 212
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 170 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 213
Component Inspection .......................................... 172 Component Inspection .......................................... 214
Removal and Installation ...................................... 172 Removal and Installation ....................................... 214
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 173 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 215
Description ............................................................ 173 Component Description ........................................ 215
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 173 .215
Removal and Installation ...................................... 180 Removal and Installation ....................................... 221
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 222
VALVE ..................................................................... 181 Component Description ........................................ 222
Component Description ........................................ 181 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 222
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 223
. 181 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 223
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 181 Component Inspection .......................................... 224
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 181 Removal and Installation ....................................... 224
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 182 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 225
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 225

DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 225 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ..................................... 281
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 226 Component Description ........................................ 281 A
Component Inspection ......................................... 227 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Removal and Installation ...................................... 227 . 281
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................ 228 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 281 EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 228 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 282
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 228 Overall Function Check ........................................ 283
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 228 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 284
Component Inspection ......................................... 229 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 287 C
Removal and Installation ...................................... 229 Component Inspection .......................................... 291
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 230 Removal and Installation ...................................... 293
Component Description ........................................ 230 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 294 D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Description ........................................ 294
. 230 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 230 . 294 E
Overall Function Check ........................................ 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 295
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 233 Overall Function Check ........................................ 295
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 236 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 297 F
Removal and Installation ...................................... 239 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 300
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 240 Component Inspection .......................................... 302
Component Description ........................................ 240 Removal and Installation ...................................... 304 G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
. 240 FUNCTION .............................................................. 305
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 240 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 305 H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 305
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 242 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 307
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 245 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 311
I
Removal and Installation ...................................... 248 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 249 FUNCTION .............................................................. 317
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 317 J
. 249 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 319
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 249 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 323
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 250 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 328 K
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 251 Component Description ........................................ 328
Removal and Installation ...................................... 257 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 328 L
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 258 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 330
Component Description ........................................ 258 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 331
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection .......................................... 333
. 258 Removal and Installation ...................................... 333 M
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 258 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 334
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 261 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 334
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 264 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 334
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 .................................... 270 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 336
Component Description ........................................ 270 Component Inspection .......................................... 338
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ...................................... 338
. 270 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 339
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 270 Component Description ........................................ 339
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 271 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Overall Function Check ........................................ 271 . 339
Component Inspection ......................................... 278 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 341

Component Inspection .......................................... 345 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 401
Removal and Installation ...................................... 345 Component Inspection .......................................... 404
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS- Removal and Installation ....................................... 404
FIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 346 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL-
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 346 UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 405
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 347 Description ............................................................ 405
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 347 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ............................................ 356 .405
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 356 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 406
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 356 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 407
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 357 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 409
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 358 Component Inspection .......................................... 410
Component Inspection .......................................... 359 Removal and Installation ....................................... 411
Removal and Installation ...................................... 360 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 361 VALVE ...................................................................... 412
Component Description ........................................ 361 Component Description ........................................ 412
. 361 .412
Removal and Installation ...................................... 367 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ......... 368 VALVE ...................................................................... 419
. 368 .419
Removal and Installation ...................................... 376 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC- SENSOR .................................................................. 425
TION ........................................................................ 377 Component Description ........................................ 425
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 377 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 377 .425
Overall Function Check ........................................ 378 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 425
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 383 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 426
System Description ............................................... 383 Component Inspection .......................................... 427
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 383 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 383 SENSOR .................................................................. 428
Overall Function Check ........................................ 384 Component Description ........................................ 428
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 388 .428
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 431
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 397 Component Inspection .......................................... 433
Description ............................................................ 397 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode SENSOR .................................................................. 434
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 398 .434
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 399 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 434

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 436 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 477 A
Component Inspection ......................................... 441 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 479
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 442 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 481 EC
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 450 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 482 C
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 450 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 484
Overall Function Check ........................................ 452 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 484 D
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 460 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 487
Component Description ........................................ 460 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 489 E
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 461 . 489
Removal and Installation ...................................... 461 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 489 F
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 462 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 489
Component Description ........................................ 462 Overall Function Check ........................................ 490
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 462 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 491 G
Overall Function Check ........................................ 462 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 492
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 463 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .... 494
Removal and Installation ...................................... 463 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 494 H
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......... 464 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .......................... 495
Component Description ........................................ 464 Description ............................................................ 495
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 464 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 495
I
Removal and Installation ...................................... 465 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 496
DTC P0500 VSS ..................................................... 466 Description ............................................................ 496 J
Description ........................................................... 466 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 496
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 466 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 496 K
Overall Function Check ........................................ 466 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 497
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 467 Description ............................................................ 497
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 468 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode L
Description ........................................................... 468 . 498
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 468 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 498
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 468 Overall Function Check ........................................ 499
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 469 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 501 M
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 470 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 503
Description ........................................................... 470 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 508
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 470 Component Inspection .......................................... 508
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 470 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 510
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ..................................... 472 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 510
Component Description ........................................ 472 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 510
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 511
. 472 Removal and Installation ...................................... 511
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 472 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 512
Component Inspection ......................................... 476 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 513
Removal and Installation ...................................... 476 Removal and Installation ...................................... 513
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 477 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH .................... 514

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 551
. 514 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 551
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 514 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 552
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 515 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 553
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 516 Component Inspection .......................................... 555
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 517 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Inspection .......................................... 520 RELAY ..................................................................... 556
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 521 Component Description ........................................ 556
Component Description ........................................ 521 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .556
. 521 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 556
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 521 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 556
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 523 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 559
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 524 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Component Inspection .......................................... 526 FUNCTION .............................................................. 562
DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION ................................... 528 Description ............................................................ 562
DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH .......................... 529 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 564
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ....................................... 567
. 529 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 568
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 529 Component Description ........................................ 568
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 531 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 568
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 538 Component Inspection .......................................... 571
Component Description ........................................ 538 Removal and Installation ....................................... 572
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
. 538 ACTUATOR ............................................................. 573
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 538 Component Description ........................................ 573
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 540 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 573
Component Inspection .......................................... 545 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 575
DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ......... 546 Component Description ........................................ 575
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 546 .575
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 548 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 577
Component Description ........................................ 548 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 578
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 548 Component Inspection .......................................... 581
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 548 Removal and Installation ....................................... 581
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 549 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 582
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE Component Description ........................................ 582
REVOLUTION SENSOR) ........................................ 550 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Description ............................................................ 550 .582
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 582
. 550 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 583
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 550 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 584
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 551 Component Inspection .......................................... 588
Description ............................................................ 551 Removal and Installation ....................................... 588
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 589

. 589 Component Inspection .......................................... 640 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 589 Removal and Installation ...................................... 640
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 590 ICC BRAKE SWITCH ............................................. 641
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 591 Component Description ........................................ 641 EC
Component Inspection ......................................... 595 . 641
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ..................................... 596 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 643 C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 649
. 596 Component Description ........................................ 649 D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 596 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 650
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 597 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 655
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 598 Component Inspection .......................................... 660 E
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 599 Removal and Installation ...................................... 661
Component Inspection ......................................... 603 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................. 662
Removal and Installation ...................................... 603 Component Description ........................................ 662
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................... 604 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 663 F
Component Description ........................................ 604 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 664
. 604 SNOW MODE SWITCH .......................................... 667 G
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 604 Description ............................................................ 667
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 605 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 606 Mode ..................................................................... 667 H
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 616 Component Inspection .......................................... 671
I
Component Description ........................................ 616 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ...................... 672
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 672
. 616 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 674
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 617 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 674 J
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 618 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 674
Component Inspection ......................................... 622 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 674
ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 623 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 674 K
Component Description ........................................ 623 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 674
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 674
. 623 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 674 L
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 624 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 674
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 625 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 674
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 626 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 674
Description ........................................................... 626 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 674 M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Fuel Injector .......................................................... 675
. 626 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 675
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 626
FUEL INJECTOR .................................................... 628 VK45DE
Component Description ........................................ 628
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 676
. 628 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 676
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 629 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 680
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 630 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 684
Component Inspection ......................................... 634 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
Removal and Installation ...................................... 634 (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
FUEL PUMP ........................................................... 635 SIONER” ............................................................... 684
Description ........................................................... 635 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover. 684
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
. 635 A/T ........................................................................ 684
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 636 Precaution ............................................................ 685

PREPARATION ....................................................... 688 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 795
Special Service Tools ........................................... 688 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 689 Mode ..................................................................... 799
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 690 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.801
System Diagram ................................................... 690 Description ............................................................ 801
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 691 Testing Condition .................................................. 801
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 693 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 801
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 802
Speed) .................................................................. 694 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .................... 695 DENT ....................................................................... 811
Input/Output Signal Chart ..................................... 695 Description ............................................................ 811
System Description ............................................... 695 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 811
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 696 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 812
System Description ............................................... 696 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 812
Component Description ........................................ 697 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 813
CAN COMMUNICATION ......................................... 698 Ground Inspection ................................................. 818
System Description ............................................... 698 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.819
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 699 Description ............................................................ 819
Description ............................................................ 699 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 819
Component Inspection .......................................... 702 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 819
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 703 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 821
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................... 822
(ORVR) .................................................................... 706 Description ............................................................ 822
System Description ............................................... 706 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 822
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 711 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ......................... 824
Description ............................................................ 711 Description ............................................................ 824
Component Inspection .......................................... 711 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM- .825
NATS) ...................................................................... 713 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 825
Description ............................................................ 713 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 826
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 714 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 827
Introduction ........................................................... 714 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 830
Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 714 Component Inspection .......................................... 834
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 715 Removal and Installation ....................................... 835
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 729 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1
OBD System Operation Chart .............................. 731 HEATER ................................................................... 836
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 737 Description ............................................................ 836
Basic Inspection ................................................... 737 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 742 .836
VIN Registration ................................................... 743 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 836
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 743 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 836
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 744 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 837
Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 744 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 840
Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 746 Component Inspection .......................................... 842
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 748 Removal and Installation ....................................... 842
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 748 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.843
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 754 Description ............................................................ 843
Fail-Safe Chart ..................................................... 756 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 757 .843
Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 761 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 843
Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 768 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 844
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 769 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 845
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 771 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 848
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 771 Component Inspection .......................................... 850
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 780 Removal and Installation ....................................... 850
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 792 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID

VALVE ..................................................................... 851 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 892
Component Description ........................................ 851 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 893 A
. 851 Component Inspection .......................................... 894
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 851 Removal and Installation ...................................... 894 EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 851 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ....................................... 895
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 852 Component Description ........................................ 895
Component Inspection ......................................... 857 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 895 C
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR .................................... 858 Component Inspection .......................................... 897
Component Description ........................................ 858 Removal and Installation ...................................... 897 D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 898
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 858 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 898 E
Overall Function Check ........................................ 860 Component Inspection .......................................... 899
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 861 Removal and Installation ...................................... 899
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 862 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 900 F
Component Inspection ......................................... 865 Component Description ........................................ 900
Removal and Installation ...................................... 866 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ........................ 867 . 900 G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 901
. 867 Overall Function Check ........................................ 902 H
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 867 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 903
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 869 Removal and Installation ...................................... 909
I
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 870 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 910
Component Inspection ......................................... 872 Component Description ........................................ 910
Removal and Installation ...................................... 873 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 874 . 910 J
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 874 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 912 K
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 876 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 915
Component Inspection ......................................... 878 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 919 L
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ......................... 879 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 879 . 919
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 879 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 919 M
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 881 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 921
Component Inspection ......................................... 884 Removal and Installation ...................................... 927
Removal and Installation ...................................... 884 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 928
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ........................... 885 Component Description ........................................ 928
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 928
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 887 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 934
Component Inspection ......................................... 891 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ..................................... 940
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ..................................... 892 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 892 . 940

DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 941 1008
Overall Function Check ........................................ 942 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1008
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 943 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1009
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 946 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1010
Component Inspection .......................................... 949 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1011
Removal and Installation ...................................... 950 Component Inspection ......................................... 1014
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ..................................... 951 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1014
Component Description ........................................ 951 DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS-
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode FIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE .................... 1015
. 951 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1015
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 951 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1016
Overall Function Check ........................................ 953 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................. 1025
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 954 Component Description ....................................... 1025
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 957 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1025
Component Inspection .......................................... 962 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1025
Removal and Installation ...................................... 963 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1026
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 964 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1027
Component Description ........................................ 964 Component Inspection ......................................... 1029
. 964 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ......................... 1030
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 964 Component Description ....................................... 1030
Overall Function Check ........................................ 966 1030
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 967 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1030
Component Inspection .......................................... 973 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1032
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Component Inspection ......................................... 1036
FUNCTION .............................................................. 975 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1036
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 975 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SEN-
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 975 SOR (PHASE) ........................................................ 1037
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 977 Component Description ....................................... 1037
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM 1037
FUNCTION .............................................................. 986 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1037
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 986 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1038
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 986 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1039
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 988 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1040
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 992 Component Inspection ......................................... 1043
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 997 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1043
Component Description ........................................ 997 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC-
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 997 TION .......................................................................
1044
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 997 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1044
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 999 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1044
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1000 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1045
Component Inspection .........................................1002 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1046
Removal and Installation .....................................1002 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 1049
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .........................1003 System Description .............................................. 1049
Component Description .......................................1003 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1049
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1003 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1049
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1003 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1050
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1004 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1051
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1005 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 1054
Component Inspection .........................................1007 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1054
Removal and Installation .....................................1007 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1055
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ...........................1008 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1057
Component Description .......................................1008 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............................1063 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1097
Description ..........................................................1063 Component Inspection .........................................1099 A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
1063 SENSOR ................................................................1100
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1064 Component Description .......................................1100 EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1064 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1065 1100
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1067 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1100
Component Inspection ........................................1070 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1101 C
Removal and Installation .....................................1070 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1102
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL- Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1103
UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....................1071 Component Inspection .........................................1107 D
Description ..........................................................1071 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................1108
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1108
1071 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1109 E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1072 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1110
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1072 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................1116
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1073 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1116
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1075 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1117 F
Component Inspection ........................................1076 Overall Function Check .......................................1118
Removal and Installation .....................................1077 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1119
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................1125 G
VALVE ....................................................................1078 Component Description .......................................1125
Component Description .......................................1078 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1125
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1125 H
1078 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1126
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1078 Removal and Installation .....................................1126
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1079 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................1127
I
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1080 Component Description .......................................1127
Component Inspection ........................................1083 Overall Function Check .......................................1127
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1128 J
VALVE ....................................................................1085 Removal and Installation .....................................1128
Component Description .......................................1085 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .........1129
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Description .......................................1129 K
1085 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1129
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1085 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1129
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1086 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1130 L
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1087 Removal and Installation .....................................1130
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1088 DTC P0500 VSS .....................................................1131
Component Inspection ........................................1089 Description ...........................................................1131
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1131 M
SENSOR ................................................................1091 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1131
Component Description .......................................1091 Overall Function Check .......................................1132
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1132
1091 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1133
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1091 Description ...........................................................1133
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1092 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1133
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1092 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1133
Component Inspection ........................................1093 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1134
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1135
SENSOR ................................................................1094 Description ...........................................................1135
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1135
1094 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1136
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1094 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................1137
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1095 Component Description .......................................1137
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1096 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1137

On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1137 Overall Function Check ........................................1173
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1137 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1175
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1138 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1177
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1139 Main 13 Causes of Overheating ..........................1181
Component Inspection .........................................1141 Component Inspection .........................................1182
Removal and Installation .....................................1141 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................1183
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................1142 Component Description .......................................1183
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1142 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1183
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1142 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1184
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1143 Removal and Installation ......................................1184
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1144 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................1185
DTC P0605 ECM ....................................................1146 Component Description .......................................1185
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1146 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1185
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1146 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1186
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1147 Removal and Installation ......................................1186
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1149 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH ...................1187
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1149 Component Description .......................................1187
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1150 1187
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH .....................................1154 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1188
Component Description .......................................1154 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1189
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1190
1154 Component Inspection .........................................1193
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1154 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ...............1194
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1154 Component Description .......................................1194
Overall Function Check .......................................1155 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1156 1194
DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SEN- DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1195
SOR ........................................................................1159 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1196
Component Description .......................................1159 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1197
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection ......................................... 1200
1159 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION .................................. 1201
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1159 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1201
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1159 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1201
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1161 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1201
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1164 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH ......................... 1202
Component Inspection .........................................1167 Component Description ....................................... 1202
Removal and Installation .....................................1167 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ...1168 1202
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1168 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1202
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .........................1169 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1203
Description ...........................................................1169 Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1204
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1169 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1205
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1169 Component Inspection ......................................... 1210
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1169 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .....................1211
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ...........1170 Component Description .......................................1211
Description ...........................................................1170 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1170 1211
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1170 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1211
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1212
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE .......1171 Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1213
Description ...........................................................1171 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1214
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection ......................................... 1218
1172 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ........ 1219
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1172 Component Description ....................................... 1219

On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1219 Component Inspection .........................................1250
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1219 Removal and Installation .....................................1251 A
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1220 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ...1221 ACTUATOR ............................................................1252
Component Description .......................................1221 Component Description .......................................1252 EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1221 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1252
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1221 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1252
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1222 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1253
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................1254 C
REVOLUTION SENSOR) ......................................1223 Component Description .......................................1254
Description ..........................................................1223 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1254 D
1223 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1254
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1223 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1255
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1223 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1256 E
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1224 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1257
Component Description .......................................1224 Component Inspection .........................................1259
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation .....................................1260
1224 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................1261 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1224 Component Description .......................................1261
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1225 1261 G
Component Inspection ........................................1227 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1262
Removal and Installation .....................................1228 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1263 H
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ...............................1229 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1264
Description ..........................................................1229 Component Inspection .........................................1267
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation .....................................1267
I
1229 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................1268
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1230 1268 J
Component Inspection ........................................1233 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1269
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Wiring Diagram ....................................................1270 K
RELAY ...................................................................1234 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1271
Component Description .......................................1234 Component Inspection .........................................1274
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation .....................................1274 L
1234 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................1275
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1236 1275 M
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1276
FUNCTION .............................................................1240 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1277
Description ..........................................................1240 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1278
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1240 Component Inspection .........................................1282
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1240 Removal and Installation .....................................1282
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1241 DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 .....................1283
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1242 Component Description .......................................1283
Component Inspection ........................................1246 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Removal and Installation .....................................1246 1283
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .......1247 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1283
Component Description .......................................1247 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1284
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1247 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1285
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1247 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1288
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1248 Removal and Installation .....................................1294
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1249 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ........................................1295
Component Description .......................................1295

1295 Component Inspection ......................................... 1339
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1296 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1340
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1297 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 1341
Component Inspection .........................................1301 Component Description ....................................... 1341
ASCD INDICATOR .................................................1302 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1342
Component Description .......................................1302 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1343
1302 SNOW MODE SWITCH .......................................... 1346
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1303 Description ........................................................... 1346
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1304 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ...............................1305 Mode ....................................................................1346
Description ...........................................................1305 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1347
1305 Component Inspection ......................................... 1350
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1305 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTOR ...................................................1307 (VIAS) .....................................................................
1351
Component Description .......................................1307 Description ........................................................... 1351
1307 1352
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1308 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1353
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1309 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1355
Component Inspection .........................................1313 Component Inspection ......................................... 1358
Removal and Installation .....................................1313 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1359
FUEL PUMP ...........................................................1314 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 1360
Description ...........................................................1314 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1360
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ... 1362
1314 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 1362
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1315 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 1362
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1316 Calculated Load Value ......................................... 1362
Component Inspection .........................................1319 Mass Air Flow Sensor .......................................... 1362
Removal and Installation .....................................1319 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 1362
ICC BRAKE SWITCH .............................................1320 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 1362
Component Description .......................................1320 Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ............................ 1362
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ...................... 1362
1320 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 1362
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1321 A/F Sensor 1 Heater ............................................ 1362
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1322 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ......................... 1363
Component Inspection .........................................1327 Throttle Control Motor .......................................... 1363
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................1328 Fuel Injector ......................................................... 1363
Component Description .......................................1328 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 1363
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1329

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE] PFP:00024
A
DTC No. Index NBS003KU
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . C
DTC*1
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
2 ECM*3 D
GST*
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-156
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-156 E

U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) EC-159
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — F
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-161
G
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-165
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-165 H
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-173
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-173
P0051 0051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-165 I
P0052 0052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-165
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-173
J
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-173
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-181
P0081 0081 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 EC-181 K
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-188
L
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-205
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-205 M
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-210
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-215
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-215
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-222
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR EC-225
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-228
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-230
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-240
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-249
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-258
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-270
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-281

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
DTC*1
Items
3 (CONSULT-II screen terms)
2 ECM*
GST*
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-294
P0150 0150 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-230
P0151 0151 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-240
P0152 0152 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-249
P0153 0153 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-258
P0157 0157 HO2S2 (B2) EC-270
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-281
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-294
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-305
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-317
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-328
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-334
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-339
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-339
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-346
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-346
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-356
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-361
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-368
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-377
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-383
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-388
P0443 0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-397
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-412
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-425
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-442

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*
GST*2
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-450 EC
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-460
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-462
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-464 C
P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-464
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 EC-466
D
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-468
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-472 E
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-477
P0605 0605 ECM EC-481
F
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-484
P0700 0700 TCM AT-111
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-112 G
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-134
P0717 0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-116
H
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 AT-118
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-125
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-127 I
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-129
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-489
J
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-494
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-495 K
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-496
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-497
L
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-510
EC-514 (Models with ICC), M
P1564 1564 ASCD SW
EC-521 (Models with ASCD)
P1568 1568 ICC COMMAND VALUE*6 EC-528
EC-529 (Models with ICC),
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-550
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED EC-550
P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-141
P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-146
P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-148
P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-150
P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-152
P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-154

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*
GST*
P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-156
P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-158
P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-160
P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-162
P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-164
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-551
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR EC-556
P2101 2101 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-562
P2118 2118 ETC MOT EC-568
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR EC-573
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-575
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-589
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-596
P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-604
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
*6: For models with ICC system.

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
Alphabetical Index NBS003KV
A
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
● If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. EC
Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
DTC*1 C
Items
ECM*3
GST*2
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 EC-230 D
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 EC-240
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-249
E
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-258
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 EC-604
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 EC-230 F
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 EC-240
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 EC-249
G
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 EC-258
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 EC-165 H
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 EC-165
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 EC-165
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 EC-165
I
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 AT-141
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-127 J
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-575
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-582 K
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-596
L
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572
ASCD SW P1564 1564 M
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-134
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-551
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 4 EC-156
1000*
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 EC-156
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-361
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 1010 EC-159
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 EC-494
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-368
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-510

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-346
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 AT-154
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 AT-156
ECM P0605 0605 EC-481
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 EC-477
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 EC-210
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 EC-222
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-497
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 EC-573
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 EC-562
ETC MOT P2118 2118 EC-568
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 EC-556
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 EC-442
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 EC-383
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 EC-388
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 EC-425
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 EC-450
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 AT-150
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 AT-152
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 EC-334
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 EC-328
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 EC-460
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 EC-462
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 EC-464
FUEL LEVL SEW/CIRC P0463 0463 EC-464
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-305
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-317
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 AT-160
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 AT-158

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
DTC*1
Items A
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3
ECM*
GST*2
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 EC-270 EC
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-281
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-294
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 EC-270 C
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 EC-281
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 EC-294
D
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-173
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-173
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 EC-173 E
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 EC-173
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 AT-146
F
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 AT-148
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 EC-205
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 EC-205 G
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 EC-225
ICC COMMAND VALUE*6 P1568 1568 EC-528

H
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 EC-550
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-161
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 EC-161 I
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 EC-181
J
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 EC-468
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-356 K
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 EC-356
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-129
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 AT-164
L
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 AT-162

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 EC-188
M
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-346
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-53
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 EC-489
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-112
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 EC-397
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-472
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 EC-484

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ35DE]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
TCM P0700 0700 AT-111
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-125
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 EC-495
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-496
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 EC-228
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-339
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-339
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-215
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-215
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-589
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 AT-116
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-377
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 AT-118
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 EC-466

VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 EC-412
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NBS003KW
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T NBS003KX
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. H
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, I
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, J
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-72, "HAR- K
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. L
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
M
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution NBS003KY
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect negative battery cable.
SEF289H

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
● Do not disassemble ECM.
● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
PBIB1164E
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related diagnostic information will be lost
within 24 hours.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data
– 1st trip freeze frame data
– System readiness test (SRT) codes
– Test values
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
PBIB1512E
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop- A
erly. Refer to EC-110, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value"
.
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. EC
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent. C
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri- MEF040D
ous incidents. D
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS).
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. E
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
F
SEF217U
H
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and I
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's J
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
K
SEF348N

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown
in the figure.
SEC893C
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
PBIB1569E
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.

PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools NBS003KZ
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number EC
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

C
(J-36471-A) with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
Heated oxygen
sensor wrench
D
S-NT379
E
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
(J-38365) a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Heated oxygen
sensor wrench F
S-NT636 G
(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
H
I
LEC642
(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick

Fuel pressure adapter connector type fuel lines.
J
K
LBIA0376E
(J-44626) Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor

Air fuel ratio (A/F) 1 L
sensor wrench
LEM054
(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Quick connector room.
release
PBIC0198E

PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
Tool number
Tool name
KV109E0010 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

(J-46209)
Break-out box
S-NT825
KV109E0080 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
S-NT826

PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
Commercial Service Tools NBS003L0
A
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating EVAP leak EC

i.e.: (J-41416)
S-NT703
D
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
E
S-NT704
F
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure
G
H
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant

temperature sensor I
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads K

cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
i.e.: (J-43897-18) anti-seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for
Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
L
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
M
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-
907)
S-NT779

[VQ35DE]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
System Diagram NBS003L1
PBIB2281E

[VQ35DE]
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System NBS003L2
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3 EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature C
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position & mixture ratio Fuel injector
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition E
Battery Battery voltage*3
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
F
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2
G
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of I
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor. J
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION

In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat- K
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up L
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation M
● When selector lever is changed from N to D
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation

[VQ35DE]
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst 1 can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-240, "DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture ratio
within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst 1. Even if the switching characteris-
tics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from
heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN com-
pared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

[VQ35DE]
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
A
EC
SEF179U D
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used E
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
F
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper- H
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System NBS003L3
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART I

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 J

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature K
Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
L
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage*2 M
Wheel sensor 1
Vehicle speed*
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage

[VQ35DE]
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) NBS003L4
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel cut con-
Fuel injector
trol
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-31, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System" .

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
[VQ35DE]
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL PFP:23710
A
Input/Output Signal Chart NBS003L5

Air conditioner switch 1 EC
Air conditioner ON signal*
Throttle position sensor Throttle position C
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature cut control
D
Battery 2
Battery voltage*
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
E
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. F
System Description NBS003L6

G
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. H
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. I
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. J

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[VQ35DE]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
Electric throttle control
Park/Neutral position (PNP) ASCD vehicle speed control
Gear position actuator
switch
Unified meter and A/C amp. Vehicle speed*
TCM Powertrain revolution*
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATOR OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is pressed
● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
● Brake pedal is depressed
● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position
● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
● VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.

[VQ35DE]
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the A
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
EC
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition
must meet following conditions.
● Brake pedal is released C
● Selector lever is in other than P and N positions
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
D
Component Description NBS003L8
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-521 . E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-538 and EC-616 .
F
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-538 , EC-551 and EC-616 .
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR G
Refer to EC-556 , EC-562 , EC-568 and EC-573 .
ASCD INDICATOR H
Refer to EC-623 .

CAN COMMUNICATION
[VQ35DE]
CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-32, "CAN Communication Unit" , about CAN communication for detail.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
A
Description NBS003LA
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. I
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
K

[VQ35DE]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
PBIB2096E

[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB2295E

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003LB
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB1044E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 ,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-410, "Component Inspection" .
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

[VQ35DE]
EVAP SERVICE PORT
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP A
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
SEF462UA
D
Removal and Installation NBS003LC
EVAP CANISTER E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
K
PBIB1029E

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. L
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
M
PBIB1030E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage NBS003LD
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
● Do not start engine.
● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.

[VQ35DE]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
PEF838U
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure

indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
PEF917U
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-40, "EVAPO-

RATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UA

[VQ35DE]
3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP
system. A
EC
D
PBIB1611E
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). E
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
F

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[VQ35DE]
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) PFP:00032
System Description NBS003LE
PBIB1068E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
● Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
– Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
– Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-86, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
– Disconnect battery ground cable.
● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003LF
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. A
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached. C
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
F
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB1031E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

J
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
L
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

[VQ35DE]
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1031E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE

Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.

[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE C

Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I E
Check one-way valve for clogging.

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
G
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
H
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close. I
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
K
SEF665U
Component Inspection NBS003LG L

REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" . M
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.

[VQ35DE]
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
PBIB1035E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" .
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
PBIB1035E

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[VQ35DE]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
A
Description NBS003LH
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. H

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti- I
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction. J
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi- K
tions.
M
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection NBS003LI
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E

[VQ35DE]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277

IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
[VQ35DE]
IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) PFP:28591
A
Description NBS003LJ
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on EC
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-205, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM-NATS)" . C
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is dis-
played before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II. D
● When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system
and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be SEF543X
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. E

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS)
initialization and all IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
F

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
Introduction NBS003LK
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Freeze 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
Frame data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × × —
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-96,
"Fail-Safe Chart" .)
Two Trip Detection Logic NBS003LL
When a malfunction is detected for the 1st time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - × — — — — — × —
P0306 is being detected
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — × — — × — —
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-55, "EMISSION-
— × — — × — — —
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION ITEMS" .)
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.

[VQ35DE]
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means A
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
EC
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-Related Diagnostic Information NBS003LM
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS C

DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference D
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit Trip
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 page
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 — — 1 × EC-156
E
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 5 — — 2 — EC-156
1001*
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 1010 — — 1 × EC-159
NO DTC IS DETECTED. F
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — 8 —
Flashing*
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 × EC-161 G
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — — 2 × EC-161
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — × 2 × EC-165
H
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — × 2 × EC-165
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — × 2 × EC-173
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — × 2 × EC-173 I
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 — × 2 × EC-165
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 — × 2 × EC-165
J
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 — × 2 × EC-173
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 — × 2 × EC-173
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — — 2 × EC-181 K
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P0081 0081 — — 2 × EC-181
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — 2 × EC-188
L

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — 2 × EC-205
M
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-210
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-210
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-215
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-215
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 2 × EC-222
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-225
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-228
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — × 2 × EC-230
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — × 2 × EC-240
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — × 2 × EC-249
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × 2 × EC-258
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × × 2 × EC-270

[VQ35DE]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × 2 × EC-281
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-294
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 — × 2 × EC-230
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 — × 2 × EC-240
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 — × 2 × EC-249
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 × × 2 × EC-258
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 × × 2 × EC-270
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × × 2 × EC-281
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × 2 × EC-294
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-305
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-317
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-328
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — 2 × EC-334
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-339
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-339
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-346
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-346
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-346
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-346
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-346
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — 2 × EC-346
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — 2 × EC-346
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — 2 — EC-356
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-361
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-368
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — — 2 × EC-368
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-377
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-383
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-388
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 — — 2 × EC-397
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — 2 × EC-412
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — 2 × EC-425

[VQ35DE]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference A
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-442 EC
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×* 4 × 2 × EC-450
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-460
C
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-462
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — 2 × EC-464
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — 2 × EC-464 D
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-466
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-468
E
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-470
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-472
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — — 2 × EC-477 F
ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-481
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — — 1 × EC-484
TCM P0700 0700 — — 1 × AT-111 G
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × AT-112
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-134
H
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 — — 2 × AT-116
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 P0720 0720 — — 2 × AT-118

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × AT-125 I
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × AT-127
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × AT-129
J
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — — 2 × EC-489
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-494
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — 1 × EC-494 K
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — 2 — EC-495
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — 2 — EC-496
L
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-497
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-510
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-512 M
EC-514,
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 —
EC-521
ICC COMMAND VALUE*7 P1568 1568 — — 1 — EC-528

EC-529,
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — 1 —
EC-538
EC-546,
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — 1 —
EC-548
P1610 -
NATS MALFUNCTION 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — EC-53
P1615
IN PULLY SPEED P1715 1715 — — 2 — EC-550
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — 1 × AT-141
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — 1 × AT-146
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — 1 × AT-148
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — 1 × AT-150

[VQ35DE]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 — — 1 × AT-152
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — 1 × AT-154
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — 1 × AT-156
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — 1 × AT-158
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — 1 × AT-160
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — 1 × AT-162
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — 1 × AT-164
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-551
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 — — 1 × EC-556
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 — — 1 × EC-562
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — — 1 × EC-556
ETC MOT P2118 2118 — — 1 × EC-568
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 — — 1 × EC-573
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-575
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-575
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-582
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-582
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-589
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-596
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — × 2 × EC-604
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P2A03 2A03 — × 2 × EC-604
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: The trouble shooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
*8: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-62, "How to Display SRT Status" .
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-67, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-55, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.

[VQ35DE]
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-89, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confir- A
mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC EC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST C
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) D
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. E
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor- F
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc- G
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. H
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA L

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. M
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-122, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

[VQ35DE]
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-67, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Perfor-
Corresponding DTC
(CONSULT-II indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
No.
tion) ority*
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
1 EVAP control system P0442
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system P0456
2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137, P0157
HO2S 2
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.

[VQ35DE]
Example
A
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
EC
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” C
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
D
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — — E
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive F
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL ON) G
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. H
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above I
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi- J
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following K
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. L
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. M
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

[VQ35DE]
PBIB2320E
*1 EC-59 *2 EC-62 *3 EC-63
How to Display SRT Status

WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown in the fig-
ure.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
SEF949Z

[VQ35DE]
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item. A
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS EC
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below. C
● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
D
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code J

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II K
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-60, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II L
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
M

[VQ35DE]
Driving Pattern
PBIB2906E

[VQ35DE]
● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc. A
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
EC
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
C
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. D
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1: E
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than F
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
G
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. H
Pattern 3:
● Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
● replace the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed I
from 90km/h(56MPH) to 0km/h(0MPH).
Pattern 4:
● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady- J
state driving.
● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again. K
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for PBIB2244E
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle L
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
M
Suggested Transmission Gear Position
Set the selector lever in the D position.
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.

[VQ35DE]
Test value
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC (GST display) Test limit Conversion
TID CID
P0420 01H 01H Max. 1/128
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1)
P0420 02H 81H Min. 1
CATALYST
P0430 03H 02H Max. 1/128
P0430 04H 82H Min. 1
EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128mm2
EVAP SYSTEM EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20mV
EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128mm2
P0131 41H 8EH Min. 5 mV
P0132 42H 0EH Max. 5 mV
P2A00 43H 0EH Max. 0.002
P2A00 44H 8EH Min. 0.002
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 1)
P0133 45H 8EH Min. 0.004
P0130 46H 0EH Max. 5 mV
P0130 47H 8EH Min. 5 mV
P0133 48H 8EH Min. 0.004
P0151 4CH 8FH Min. 5 mV
P0152 4DH 0FH Max. 5 mV
P2A03 4EH 0FH Max. 0.002
P2A03 4FH 8FH Min. 0.002
HO2S Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 2)
P0153 50H 8FH Min. 0.004
P0150 51H 0FH Max. 5 mV
P0150 52H 8FH Min. 5 mV
P0153 53H 8FH Min. 0.004
P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500ms
P0137 1AH 86H Min. 10mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
P0138 1BH 06H Max. 10mV
P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10mV
P0159 21H 87H Min. 10mV/500ms
P0157 22H 87H Min. 10mV
P0158 23H 07H Max. 10mV
P0158 24H 07H Max. 10mV
P0032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
P0031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV
P0052 59H 11H Max. 5 mV
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)
P0051 5AH 91H Min. 5 mV
HO2S HEATER
P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1)
P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20mV
P0058 2FH 0BH Max. 20mV
P0057 30H 8BH Min. 20mV

[VQ35DE]
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC A
With CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. EC
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu-
ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE: C
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. D
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” E
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. F
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SCIA5671E
With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

[VQ35DE]
2. Perform AT-43 . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-43 . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-69, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) NBS003LN
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-672, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U

[VQ35DE]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. A
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
EC
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
C
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip E
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
F
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
● One trip detection diagnoses
G
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
I
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is J
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means K
L
MIL Flashing Without DTC

M
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-62, "How to Display
SRT Status" .
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.

[VQ35DE]
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-62, "How to Display SRT Status" .
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-69, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-
38, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-672, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

[VQ35DE]
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. A
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are EC
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
C
L
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” is indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the M
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second)
cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
69, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.

[VQ35DE]
OBD System Operation Chart NBS003LO
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-54, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
● The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (drive pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction
occurs while counting, the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-74, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS
FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-76, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

[VQ35DE]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
MIL will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.

[VQ35DE]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.

[VQ35DE]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
SEF393SD
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

[VQ35DE]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
<Driving Pattern B>
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ35DE]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
A
Basic Inspection NBS003LP
1. INSPECTION START
EC
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
C
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections D
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket E
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF. F

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
G
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
H
J
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load. K
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
M
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

Refer to EC-82, "IDLE SPEED" .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-84, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.

[VQ35DE]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A
Refer to EC-84, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4. C
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
F
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed. G
SEF174Y H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
I
Check the following. J
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit.
Refer to EC-368, "DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. K
Refer to EC-361, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. L
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
M
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-205, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-82, "IGNITION TIMING" .
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB1602E

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.

>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed.
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

[VQ35DE]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-82, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC

OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 16.
D
PBIB1602E
E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-64, "TIMING CHAIN" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. G
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit.
Refer to EC-368, "DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" . I
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4. K

L
Refer to BL-205, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)" . M
>> GO TO 4.
19. INSPECTION END

Did you replace the ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-83, "VIN Registration" .
2. INSPECTION END
No >> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check NBS003LQ
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed with Service $01 GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
PBIB1574E
2. Check ignition timing.
PBIB1602E
Method B
1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
PBIB1567E

[VQ35DE]
2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this A
wire.
EC
PBIB1573E
G
SEF166Y

H
PBIB1602E
K
VIN Registration NBS003LS
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. L
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE M
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-49, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display.
PBIB2242E

[VQ35DE]
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning NBS003LT
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning NBS003LU
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning NBS003LV
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
● Park/neutral position switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up
For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T”
system indicates less than 0.9V.
For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.

[VQ35DE]
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
A
EC
SEF217Z
D
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
G
SEF454Y
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If H

“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. I
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
J
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) K
MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE: L
has a malfunction.
M
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.

[VQ35DE]
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-138, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check NBS003LW
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y

[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. A
2. Start engine.
pressure. EC
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
C
PBIB1603E
D
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION: E
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
● Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because S50 models do not have fuel return system. F
● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (J-44321) to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-86, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
G
2. Install the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting between fuel
damper and fuel injector tube.
3. Connect the fuel pressure test gauge (quick connector adapter H
hose) to the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. I
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

J
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. PBIB1571E
8. Check the following.

● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging K
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging

L
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction NBS003LX
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on EC-89, "WORK FLOW" .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the
example on EC-92, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence A
EC
PBIB2267E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Detailed Flow
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-92, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1 .
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
– Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
– Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-67, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION"
.)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-97, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
results.
>> GO TO 6.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A
1 1
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-94, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order. C
NOTE:
● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure. E
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
F
No >> Check according to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION

G
Perform EC-77, "Basic Inspection"
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. H
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE I

With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CON- J
SULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-139, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
Are they within the SP value? K
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
L
SEF601Z
M
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-138, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-97, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
28, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-133, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-110, "ECM Termi-
nals and Reference Value" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-67, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-67, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC-
64, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
MTBL0017

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
DTC Inspection Priority Chart NBS003LY
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
● If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● U1010 CAN communication
● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0128 Thermostat function
● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P0605 ECM
● P0643 Sensor power supply
● P0700 TCM
● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P1610 - P1615 NATS
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
A
2 ● P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EC
● P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring C
● P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor D
● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
● P0603 ECM power supply
● P0710 P0717 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772 E
P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
● P1805 Brake switch F
● P2100 P2103 P2118 Electric throttle control actuator
● P2101 Electric throttle control function
3 ● P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control G
● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0306 Misfire
H
● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
● P0442 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK)
● P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
I
● P0456 EVAP control system (VERY SMALL LEAK)
● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
● P1148 P1168 Closed loop control J
● P1211 TCS control unit
● P1212 TCS communication line
● P1564 ICC steering switch/ASCD steering switch K
● P1568 ICC command valve*
● P1572 ICC brake switch/ASCD brake switch
● P1574 ICC vehicle speed sensor/ASCD vehicle speed sensor L
● P1715 Turbine revolution sensor
● P2119 Electric throttle control actuator
M
*: Models with ICC.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Fail-Safe Chart NBS003LZ
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
actuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2128 condition.
● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Symptom Matrix Chart NBS003M0
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

EC
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

C
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
D
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL E
F
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-635
G
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-86
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-628
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-39 H
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-51
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-77 I
EC-562,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-573
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-77 J
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-649
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-149
K
EC-188,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-197
1
EC-210, L
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-222
EC-240
3 EC-240
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor EC-249 M
1 2 2 2 2 2
EC-258
EC-604
EC-215,
EC-339 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-510 ,
EC-512 ,
2 2 EC-589
EC-484,
EC-575 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-582 ,
EC-596
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-356
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-361
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-368
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-466
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-472

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

EC-477,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-481
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-181
cuit
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-489
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-662
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-626
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ATC-40
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-11
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM
A

EC


C

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA F

Fuel Fuel tank FL-10
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-45
G
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 H
—
line, Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-17
Air cleaner EM-17 I
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-17
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator) J
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-19
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-19,
Collector/Gasket EM-24 K
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-20
L
Starter circuit 3 SC-8
1
Signal plate 6 EM-123
Park/neutral position (PNP) M
4 AT-112
switch
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-101
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-123
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Valve Timing chain EM-64
mecha-
Camshaft EM-83
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-64
Intake valve
3 EM-101
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-26, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- EM-30, LU-
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 17 , LU-10 ,
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-14
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7
Cooling CO-14,
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-17
Thermostat 5 CO-27
Water pump CO-22
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-29
Cooling fan 5 EC-228
Coolant level (Low)/Contami-
5 CO-11
nated coolant
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — EC-53 or
1 1
NATS) BL-205

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Engine Control Component Parts Location NBS003M1
EC
PBIB2002E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
PBIB2003E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB1616E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
PBIB1907E
PBIB2188E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB3253E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
PBIB3256E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Vacuum Hose Drawing NBS003M2
EC
PBIB2095E
Refer to EC-30, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Circuit Diagram NBS003M3
TBWM1375E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
EC
TBWM1376E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout NBS003M4
PBIB1192E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value NBS003M5
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the passenger side instrument lower
panel. For this inspection, remove passenger side instrument
lower panel.
2. Remove ECM harness connector.
PBIB1578E
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
PBIB1512E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Body ground
● Idle speed
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 R/L ● Warm-up condition
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 R [Ignition switch: ON]
power supply (11 - 14V) EC
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]

C
Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
4 L/W
(Close) ● Selector lever: D
● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
D
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
E
5 L/B
(Open) ● Selector lever: D F
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB1105E
G
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met
H
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
6 R
heater (bank 2) minute under no load
I

● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE J
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
[Engine is running] K
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V L
Intake valve timing control
10 OR [Engine is running]
solenoid valve (bank 2)
● Warm-up condition M
● When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm
quickly
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
11 BR [Engine is running]
solenoid valve (bank 1)
quickly
PBIB1790E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel: Being turned
12 R/G
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel: Not being turned
Approximately 1.6V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB1041E
13 Y
(POS)
Approximately 1.4V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
PBIB1042E
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
Camshaft position sensor PBIB1039E
14 BR
(PHASE) (bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
16 G Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
35 B/R Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
56 L Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 R/B Approximately 2.3V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V) EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 SEC984C D
22 G Fuel injector No. 3
23 R Fuel injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
F
SEC985C
G
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater H
24 L ● Warm-up condition
(Bank 2)
● Idle speed
I
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the J
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 K
25 P
L
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
M
EVAP control system pres-
32 OR [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
33 R/L
(PHASE) (bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature sen-
34 OR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sor
air temperature.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
40 LG Fuel injector No. 6 SEC984C
41 B Fuel injector No. 4
42 P Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge vol-
45 GY
ume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
SEC991C

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
47 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor) EC
Sensor power supply
48 LG (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor)
C
Sensor power supply
49 PU (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor)
D
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Selector lever: D
E
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
● Engine stopped F
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running] G
● Warm-up condition 1.0 - 1.2V
● Idle speed
51 L/W Mass air flow sensor H
[Engine is running]
I
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
Heated oxygen sensor 2 J
55 W/R – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 2)
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load K
[Engine is running]
58 Y Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition L
76 P Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 BR Approximately 2.3V
0 - 0.2V M
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
60 PU Ignition signal No. 5 SEC986C
61 L Ignition signal No. 3
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
SEC987C

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
67 B/W Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
68 BR (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
70 L/R Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
(Compressor operates)
Engine coolant temperature
73 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
engine coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
74 LG/B – Engine: After warming up. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 1)
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
78 B/R ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
79 SB Ignition signal No. 6 SEC986C
80 GY Ignition signal No. 4
81 OR Ignition signal No. 2 0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
SEC987C

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor ground [Engine is running]
(APP sensor 1, ASCD steer- EC
82 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ing switch, ICC steering
switch) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground C
83 G/OR ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V - Battery volt- D
85 PU Data link connector
● CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected age (11 - 14V)
Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V

86 P CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the E
communication status.
Sensor power supply
90 L/B [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
F
Sensor power supply
91 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
G
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
H
● Engine stopped 0.15 - 0.60V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
98 Y/R
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
I
[Ignition switch: ON] J
Approximately 4.3V
● ICC steering switch: OFF
Approximately 0V
● MAIN switch: Pressed K
Approximately 1.3V
ICC steering switch ● CANCEL switch: Pressed
99 G/Y
(models with ICC system)
L
Approximately 3.7V
● RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
Approximately 3.0V M
● SET/COAST switch: Pressed
Approximately 2.2V
● DISTANCE switch: Pressed
Approximately 4.0V
● ASCD steering switch: OFF
Approximately 0V
● MAIN switch: Pressed
ASCD steering switch [Ignition switch: ON]

99 G/Y Approximately 1.0V
(models with ASCD system) ● CANCEL switch: Pressed
Approximately 3.0V
Approximately 2.0V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Fully released
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V
● Selector lever: P or N
102 LG/B PNP switch
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except above position (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 L/OR Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
106 OR
Fuel tank temperature sen-
107 PU/W [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature.
ICC brake switch Approximately 0V
(models with ICC system) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
108 SB
ASCD brake switch [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(models with ASCD system) (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
109 W/L Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
113 GY/R Fuel pump relay
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON
115 B/R [Engine is running]

ECM ground Body ground
116 B/W ● Idle speed
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 R/Y [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
119 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 R/W [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
A
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) NBS003M6
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function EC
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data C
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the D
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
monitor E
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. F
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
G
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
H
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes I
● Test values

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- DTC*1 FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*1
PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×
Vehicle speed sensor × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
Throttle position sensor × × × ×
× × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Fuel tank temperature sensor

EVAP control system pressure
× × ×
sensor
Intake air temperature sensor × × × ×
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×

Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Load signal × ×
Fuel level sensor × × ×
ICC steering switch × × ×
ASCD steering switch × × ×
ICC brake switch × × ×
ASCD brake switch × × ×
Snow mode switch × ×

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- DTC*1 FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK EC
PORT FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*1
PORT
Fuel injector × × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×
Throttle control motor relay × × ×

D
Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × × ×
trol solenoid valve
E
Air conditioner relay × ×
OUTPUT
Fuel pump relay × × × ×

Cooling fan relay × × × × F
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × × ×* 3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × ×*3

G
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × × ×
valve H
Calculated load value × × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. I
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-122, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
J
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure"
WORK SUPPORT MODE K
Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE L
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
M
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● IGN SW ON
● ENGINE NOT RUNNING
● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM
● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION ● IN THIS MODE VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM When registering VIN is ECM
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-55, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION ITEMS" .
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
CODE
to EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1 ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
“Mode2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 “Mode3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
“Mode4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“Mode5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
Freeze frame data
Description
item* A
VEHICL SPEED
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH-P/S [%] ● The throttle operating angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EC
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE C
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
D
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
E
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS F
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine
● Indicates the engine speed computed from speed drops below the idle rpm.
the signal of the crankshaft position sensor
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the G
(POS) and camshaft position sensor
(PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal
value may be indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×

● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor ● When the engine is stopped, a cer- H
is displayed. tain value is indicated.
● Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel injection
B/FUEL SCHDL
× pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to I
[msec]
any learned on board correction.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback tain value is indicated.
J
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × correction factor per cycle is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
● When the engine coolant tempera-
K
● The engine coolant temperature (determined ture sensor is open or short-cir-
COOLAN TEMP/S
× × by the signal voltage of the engine coolant cuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is displayed. The engine coolant temperature
determined by the ECM is displayed. L
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × ● The A/F signal computed from the input signal
A/F SEN1 (B2) [V] × of the Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed.
M
HO2S2 (B1) [V] × ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sen-
HO2S2 (B2) [V] × sor 2 is displayed.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:

×
[RICH/LEAN] RICH: means the amount of oxygen after
● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
three way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) tain value is indicated.
× LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after
[RICH/LEAN] three way catalyst is relatively large.
● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE
× × speed signal sent from combination meter is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× ×
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted
● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal
by ECM internally. Thus, it differs
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × voltage is displayed.
from ECM terminal voltage signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
● The fuel temperature (determined by the sig-
FUEL T/TMP SE
× nal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sen-
[°C] or [°F]
sor) is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE
× × signal voltage of the intake air temperature
[°C] or [°F]
sensor) is indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system
×
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is
×
[V] displayed.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com- ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL
× × puted by the ECM according to the signals of displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF]
engine speed and battery voltage. signal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS
× × ECM according to the accelerator pedal posi-
[ON/OFF]
tion sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-
AIR COND SIG
× × tioner switch as determined by the air condi-
[ON/OFF]
tioner signal.
P/N POSI SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/
× ×
[ON/OFF] neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys-
PW/ST SIGNAL tem (determined by the signal voltage of the
× ×
[ON/OFF] power steering pressure sensor signal) is indi-
cated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri-
cal load signal.
LOAD SIGNAL ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/
× ×
[ON/OFF] or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and
lighting switch are OFF.
SNOW MODE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the snow
[ON/OFF] mode switch signal.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
×
[ON/OFF] switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater
×
[ON/OFF] fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop
×
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1
× ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
[msec] ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
compensated by ECM according to the input
INJ PULSE-B2 tain computed value is indicated.
signals.
[msec]
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
×
[BTDC] ECM according to the input signals. tain value is indicated.
● Calculated load value indicates the value of
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
the current air flow divided by peak air flow.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT A
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM EC
MASS AIRFLOW
according to the signal voltage of the mass air
[g·m/s]
flow sensor.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
C
control solenoid valve control value computed
PURG VOL C/V by the ECM according to the input signals.
[%]
● The opening becomes larger as the value
increases. D
INT/V TIM (B1)
[°CA] ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced
INT/V TIM (B2) angle. E
[°CA]
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] ● The control condition of the intake valve tim-
ing control solenoid valve (determined by F
ECM according to the input signals) is indi-
INT/V SOL (B2) [%] cated.
● The advance angle becomes larger as the G
value increases.
● The air conditioner relay control condition
AIR COND RLY
× (determined by ECM according to the input H
[ON/OFF]
signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY
× determined by ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF] I
signals.
● The control condition of the EVAP canister
vent control valve (determined by ECM
VENT CONT/V J
according to the input signals) is indicated.
[ON/OFF]
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay con- K
THRTL RELAY
× trol condition determined by the ECM accord-
[ON/OFF]
ing to the input signals.
● The control condition of the cooling fan (deter- L
mined by ECM according to the input signals)
is indicated.
COOLING FAN
× HI: High speed operation
[HI/MID/LOW/OFF] M
MID: Middle speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM
HO2S2 HTR (B2) according to the input signals.
[ON/OFF]
I/P PULLY SPD ● Indicates the engine speed computed from
[rpm] the turbine revolution sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed from
[km/h] or [MPH] the revolution sensor signal.
● Display the condition of idle air volume learn-
ing
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been
[YET/CMPLT] performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already
been performed successfully.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control
[%] value computed by ECM according to the
input signals.
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● The current flow to the heater becomes larger
[%]
as the value increases.
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pres-
[V] sure sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
[km/h] or [mph] speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/
[ON/OFF] ACCELERATE switch signal.
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/
[ON/OFF] COAST switch signal.
BRAKE SW1 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
[ON/OFF] brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
VHCL SPD CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively
high compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
LO SPEED CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively
low compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] according to the input signal from the TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D can-
[ON/OFF] cel signal sent from the TCM.
DIST SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from DIS-
[ON/OFF] TANCE switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
CRUISE LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
SET LAMP
determined by the ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF]
signals.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
A/F ADJ-B1 ● Indicates the correction of factor stored in EC
ECM. The factor is calculated from the differ-
ence between the target air-fuel ratio stored in
A/F ADFJ-B2 ECM and the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F
sensor 1 signal. C
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec], ● Only # is displayed if item is unable
[Hz] or [%] to be measured. D
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width ● Figures with #s are temporary ones.
measured by the probe. They are the same figures as an
DUTY-LOW
actual piece of data which was just E
PLS WIDTH-HI previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE: F
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

G
Monitored Item
ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals H
● Indicates the engine speed computed

from the signal of the crankshaft position
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × I
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated. J
● Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated. K
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] L
× back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] ● This data also includes the data for the
cated.
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE: M
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injector
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Timing light: Set ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors

the engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch: OFF ● Fuel injector
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Selector lever: P or N ● Power transistor
● Cut off each fuel injector signal ● Spark plug
one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coil
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID”, Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan motor
“LOW” and “OFF” using CON-
SULT-II. ● IPDM E/R

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injector
● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP
● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
SEN
(Engine stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors
TROL/V ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and sound. ● Solenoid valve
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-60, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page
PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-383
EVAPORATIVE SYS- EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* P0442 EC-388

TEM EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-450
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-397

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
A
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-230
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/1279 P0133 EC-258
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 P0150 EC-230 EC
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/1289 P0153 EC-258
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-294
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-281 C
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-270
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 P0159 EC-294
D
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 P0158 EC-281
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 P0157 EC-270
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to S50 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens. E
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description F
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): G
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
H
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal- I
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... PBIB1593E J
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual. K
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc- L
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected. M
SEF707X
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-28, "How to Perform Effi-
cient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
PBIB0197E
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function NBS003M7
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-59, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND
1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
A
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This
includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03) EC
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
C
● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of D
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions. E
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canitser vent control valve
can be closed. F
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
● Low ambient temperature
Service $08 — ● Low battery voltage G
● Engine running
● Ignition switch OFF
● Low fuel temperature H
● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. I
J
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle.
K
M
PBIB1570E

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-
dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
SEF416S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor NBS003M8
Remarks: A
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in EC
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the C
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-138, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-138, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
D
A/F ALPHA-B1
See EC-138, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B2
E
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5 V
A/F SEN1 (B2) rpm
F
HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) tions are met 1.0V
– Engine: After warming up
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) G
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
at idle for 1minute under no load
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE H
indication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V I

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V

ACCEL SEN 2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V J
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN 1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V K
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
L
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF M
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Selector lever: P or N ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Selector lever: Except above OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
the engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF
Snow mode switch: ON ON
SNOW MODE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Snow mode switch: OFF OFF
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan: Operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Selector lever: P or N
INJ PULSE-B2 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 13° - 18° BTDC
IGN TIMING
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle
● Selector lever: P or N (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V even slightly, after engine starting)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No load 2,000 rpm —
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA

INT/V TIM (B1) ● Selector lever: P or N
INT/V TIM (B2) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
● Air conditioner switch: OFF Approx. 0° - 30°CA
quickly
● No load
INT/V SOL (B1) ● Selector lever: P or N
INT/V SOL (B2) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
● Air conditioner switch: OFF Approx. 0% - 50%
quickly
● No load
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
A
Engine coolant temperature is 97°C
OFF
(207°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is
between 98°C (208°F) and 99°C LOW EC
(210°F)
COOLING FAN the engine
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C MID C
(219°F)
HI
(221°F) or more
D
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and E
at idle for 1 minute under no load
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Almost the same speed as the F
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
speedometer indication
● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEHICLE SPEED
indication. speedometer indication G
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
A/F S1 HTR (B1) H
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN ● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON 1.0 - 4.0V I
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value J
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating.
displayed.
MAIN switch: Pressed ON K
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON L
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON M
OFF
Released
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
BRAKE SW1 ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 ● Ignition switch: ON
DISTANCE switch: Depressed ON
DIST SW ● Ignition switch: ON
DISTANCE switch: Released OFF
MAIN switch: pressed at the 1st time
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
→ at the 2nd time

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
● MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is between

40km/h (25MPH) and 144km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89MPH)
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode NBS003M9
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera-
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
PBIB2445E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB2099E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ35DE]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
Description NBS003MA
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition NBS003MB
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP 1” (A/T
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
● Electrical load: Not applied
Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
● Engine speed: Idle
Inspection Procedure NBS003MC
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-139, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003MD
OVERALL SEQUENCE A
EC
PBIB2268E

[VQ35DE]
PBIB3214E

[VQ35DE]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-138, "Testing Condition" . EC
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within
the SP value. C
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1
minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is D
out of the SP value even a little.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. E
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3. PBIB2369E
2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” F
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and

make sure that the indication is within the SP value. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19. H
PBIB2332E
J
3. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
K
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. L
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6.
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ35DE]
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
>> INSPECTION END
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-86, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-86, "Fuel Pressure Check" .
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.

– Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
– Clogged fuel filter
– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-635, "FUEL PUMP" .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-86, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
>> GO TO 8.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

[VQ35DE]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
– Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-649, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .)
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-628, "FUEL INJECTOR" .) EC
– Intake air leakage
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-101, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .)
C
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
D
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” E

1. Start engine.
each indication is within the SP value. F
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12. G
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

H
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
● For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-230, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
I
● For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-605, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13. K
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC. L
>> GO TO 14.
M
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 16.

[VQ35DE]
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-97, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .

OK or NG
PBIB2332E

1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
– Engine oil level is too high
– Engine oil viscosity
– Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
– Noise from engine
– Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
– Valve clearance malfunction
– Intake valve timing control function malfunction
– Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.

[VQ35DE]
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” A
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG EC
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
C
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.

D
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
E
>> GO TO 22.

F
1. Start engine.
each indication is within the SP value. G
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it.
Refer to EC-197, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . H
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
I
23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and K
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
M
24. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of IVIS(NATS) system and registration of all IVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-207, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" .
3. Perform EC-83, "VIN Registration" .
6. Perform EC-84, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> GO TO 29.

[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30.
PBIB2370E

Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
● Looseness of oil filler cap
● Disconnection of oil level gauge
● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts
● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”

OK or NG

[VQ35DE]
30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” A
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG EC
C

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[VQ35DE]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
Description NBS003ME
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of Intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
2 The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003MF
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-67, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

Perform GI-28, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS

Refer to GI-25, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ35DE]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:24110
A
Wiring Diagram NBS003MG
EC
TBWM1377E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
109 W/L Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
115 B/R [Engine is running]

120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003MH
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E

● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short ground or short power in harness or connectors.
[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
PBIB2625E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

G
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. H
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
J
Check the following. K
● Harness connectors F102, M82
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
L
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II M
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E7 terminal 17 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-649, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1610E

[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
12. PBIB1630E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB1191E
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 11.

● Harness or connectors E211, M41
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[VQ35DE]
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. D
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
14. CHECK 20A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse from IPDM E/R. H
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. I
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.
15. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS J
Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
K
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

[VQ35DE]
16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
17. DETECTION MALFUNCTIONING PART

>> Repair open circuit or shoat to power in harness connectors.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)"
Ground Inspection NBS003MI
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
● Remove the ground bolt or screw.
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
● Clean as required to assure good contact.
● Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.

[VQ35DE]
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" .
A
EC
PBIB1870E

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[VQ35DE]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description NBS003MJ
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003MK
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
U1000*1 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control

1000*1 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line ECM cannot communicate for more than the
U1001*2 ●
shorted)
specified time.
1001*2
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003ML

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003MM
EC
TBWM1378E

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003MN
Go to LAN-3, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .

DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
[VQ35DE]
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
A
Description NBS004M4
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004M5
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
U1010 Initializing CAN communication bus is mal- E
CAN communication bus ● ECM
1010 functioning.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004M6
WITH CONSULT-II F
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G
SEF058Y
J
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
K

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004M7
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select Service $04 with GST.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
A
Description NBS003MO
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve C
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
D
PBIB3276E
J
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid K
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003MP
Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION M
INT/V TIM (B2) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
● Air conditioner switch: OFF Approx. 0° - 30°CA
quickly
● No load
INT/V SOL (B2) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
● Air conditioner switch: OFF Approx. 0% - 50%
quickly
● No load

[VQ35DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003MQ
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
P0011 ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
0011 ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 1)
● Intake valve control solenoid valve
Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
P0021 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
0021 ● Timing chain installation
(Bank 2)
● Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for
intake valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003MR
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0075 or P0081. Refer to EC-181, "DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive sec-
onds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F)
PBIB0164E
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 7.3 msec
Selector lever D position
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

[VQ35DE]
A
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003MS EC
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine. C
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
KG >> Go to LU-8, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .
E
F
PBIA8559J
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G

OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
K
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
M
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
SEC905C

[VQ35DE]
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-64, "TIMING CHAIN" .
No >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Refer to EM-72, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.

For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-363 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-370 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003MT
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed. PBIB2275E
Removal and Installation NBS003MU

Refer to EM-64, "TIMING CHAIN" .

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER PFP:22693
A
Description NBS003TA
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
heater control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at the specified range.
D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003TB

E
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003TC
G
P0031
0031 The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
1 heater control circuit range. circuit is open or shorted.] H
P0051 low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
0051 through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
P0032 I
0032 The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
1 heater control circuit range. circuit is shorted.]
P0052 high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM J
0052 through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003TD K

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
M
With CONSULT-II
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-170, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y

[VQ35DE]
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003TE
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1416E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1417E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003TF
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or Replace ground connections.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
PBIB2190E
2. Turn ignition switch ON. E

3. Check voltage between air fuel ratio sensor 1 terminal 3 and
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

● Harness connectors E64, F65 J
● IPDM E/R harness connector E7
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio sensor 1 and fuse K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

L
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
1 terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[VQ35DE]
5. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio sensor 1.

Perform EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003TG
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean
exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved
anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation NBS003TH
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
A
Description NBS003MV
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control C
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, D
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater E
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
F
● Engine: After warming up
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003MW

H
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up I
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF J
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003MX
Trouble diagnosis K
name
P0037
0037 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen L
(Bank 1) sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater open or shorted.)
P0057 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
control circuit low
0057 through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2) M
P0038
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
P0058 control circuit high ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
0058 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003MY
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
4. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
. SEF176Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003MZ
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1379E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
74 LG/B – Engine: After warming up. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1380E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
following conditions are met.
6 R
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003N0

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
EC
D
PBIB1576E
3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0969E H

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors E64, F65
J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
K
>> Repair open circuit or short ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 25 3 1
P0057, P0058 6 3 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ35DE]
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003N1
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB0970E
Removal and Installation NBS003N2
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2


DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
A
Component Description NBS003TN
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. EC
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. C
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control D
position.
PBIB1842E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003TO

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
INT/V SOL (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF
When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
G
quickly
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003TP H
P0075 I
0075 ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
P0081 solenoid valve circuit
valve. J
0081 ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003TQ

K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003TR
BANK 1
TBWM1394E

[VQ35DE]
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed D
7 - 12V
11 BR [Engine is running]
solenoid valve (bank 1) E
quickly
F
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] G
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF] H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
119 R BATTERY VOLTAGE I
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
J

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1395E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed D
7 - 12V
10 OR [Engine is running]
solenoid valve (bank 2) E
quickly
F
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
J

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003TS
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1562E

4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E

● Harness connectors F10, F211 (bank 1)
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
● Harness connectors F211, F10 (bank 1)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC
C
5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-164, "Component Inspection" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. E

Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-363 for CKP sensor (POS), EC-370 and EC-372 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END G
Component Inspection NBS003TT
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H

valve as follows. I
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
J
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. K

L
CAUTION: M
NOTE:
Removal and Installation NBS003TU


DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description NBS003N3
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor is placed in the stream of intake air.
It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIB1604E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003N4

CAL/LD VALUE
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003N5
● Harness or connectors
(Mass air flow sensor circuit is
open or shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Mass air flow sensor
A)
under light load driving condition.
● EVAP control system pressure
sensor
● Intake air temperature sensor
P0101 Mass air flow sensor cir-
0101 cuit range/performance
(Mass air flow sensor circuit is
open or shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Intake air leaks
B)
under heavy load driving condition. ● Mass air flow sensor
sensor

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003N6
A
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A C
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
D
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-192, "Diagnostic Procedure" F
.
SEF174Y H
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
I
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-192, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
M
increases.
If NG, go to EC-192, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
SEF243Y

[VQ35DE]
onds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-192, "Diagnostic Procedure" PBIB0199E
.
Overall Function Check NBS003N7

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003N8
EC
TBWM1381E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
51 L/W Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003N9
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.

Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB2625E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

G
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
H
J
PBIB1565E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester. K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB1168E

● Harness connectors E211, M41
● Harness connectors M82, F102
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM

[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003NA
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
3. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the follow-
ing conditions. C
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 D
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.0 - 1.2
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to E
1.6 - 2.0
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
PBIB2371E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about F
4,000 rpm.
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
G
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.

H
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. I

7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. J
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
K
Without CONSULT-II
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. L
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V M
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
1.0 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.6 - 2.0
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.

[VQ35DE]
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
Removal and Installation NBS003NB
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
A
Component Description NBS003NC
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor is placed in the stream of intake air.
It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire EC
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
the heat loss. C
Therefore, electric current is supplied to hot wire is changed to main-
tain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change. D
PBIB1604E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003ND

G
CAL/LD VALUE
● No load
H
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s I
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003NE

J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
Trouble diagnosis
name K
(Mass air flow sensor circuit is open or
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is shorted.)
0102 circuit low input sent to ECM. L
● Intake air leaks
● Mass air flow sensor
● Harness or connectors M
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (Mass air flow sensor circuit is open or
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM. shorted.)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003NF
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
With CONSULT-II
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
SEF058Y
With GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003NG
EC
TBWM1381E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003NH
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.

● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB2625E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

G
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
H
J
PBIB1565E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester. K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor

[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003NI

With CONSULT-II
ing conditions. C

1.0 - 1.2
1.6 - 2.0
PBIB2371E
4,000 rpm.
G

H

K
Without CONSULT-II
signal) and ground.
1.0 - 1.2
1.6 - 2.0
PBIB1106E
4,000 rpm.

[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003NJ


DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description NBS003NK
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is built-into mass air flow
sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a EC
signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C
PBIB1604E
E
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.30 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.22 0.283 - 0.359 G
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake
air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. I
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003NL
Trouble diagnosis J
name
Intake air tempera-
P0112 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit ● Harness or connectors
0112 sent to ECM. K
low input (Intake air temperature sensor circuit is open
Intake air tempera- or shorted.)
P0113 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit ● Intake air temperature sensor
0113 sent to ECM. L
high input
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003NM
NOTE: M
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y

[VQ35DE]
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003NN
EC
TBWM0288E

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003NO

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) harness connector.
PBIB1565E
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and

ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
PBIB1169E
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS003NP
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
F
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sen-
sor). G
PBIB1604E
L
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS003NQ

M

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description NBS003NR
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is used to detect the

engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine
coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is
sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of
the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
-10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003NS

Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir- ● Harness or connectors
0117 sent to ECM.
cuit low input (Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit is
Engine coolant tem- open or shorted.)
perature sensor cir- ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
Condition
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003NT
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
D
SEF058Y
F
WITH GST
G

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003NU
TBWM0289E

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003NV

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . EC
E
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness

connector.
H
PBIB1563E
K
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
Voltage: Approximately 5V L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
M
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003NW
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor termi-
nals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS003NX

Refer to CO-27, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY" .

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description NBS003NY
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position (TP) sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor EC
responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, C
these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the D
ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003NZ

THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Selector lever: D G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003O0 H

I
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
J
● Electric throttle control actuator
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- (TP sensor 2)
0123 2 circuit high input sor 2 is sent to ECM.
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2) K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. L
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 M
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003O1
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003O2
EC
TBWM0393E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003O3

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
EC
D
PBIB1557E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
M
● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram

47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-217
91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-584
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ35DE]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003O4
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A

3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
4. Set selector lever to D position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1signal),
69 (TP sensor 2signal) and body ground under the following C
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage D
50 Fully released More than 0.36V
(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
Fully released Less than 4.75V E
69
(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB1608E
F
step.
8. Perform EC-84, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G
Removal and Installation NBS003O5
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . H

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description NBS003O6
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-210, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine
coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is
sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of
the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: SEF012P
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output

voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM termi-
nals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003O7
● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not ● Harness or connectors
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed (High resistance in the circuit)
P0125 after starting the engine.
ant temperature for
0125 ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control. ● Thermostat

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003O8
A
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II C
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). D
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. E
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST G
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003O9
H
I
PBIB2625E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-27, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY"
.

Refer to EC-212, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003OA

PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS003OB


DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description NBS003OC
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to EC
the ECM.
PBIB1604E
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.30 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.22 0.283 - 0.359 G
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake
air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003OD
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is (Intake air temperature sensor circuit is
P0127 Intake air temperature
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal open or shorted)
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor.
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003OE

L
NOTE:
M
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.

[VQ35DE]
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 90°C (194°F).
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con- SEF189Y
secutive seconds.
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003OF

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003OG
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5
and 6 under the following conditions.
EC
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sen- C
sor).
D
PBIB1604E
SEF012P H
Removal and Installation NBS003OH
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I


DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION PFP:21200
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003OI
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
● Thermostat
The engine coolant temperature does not
P0128 ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though
0128 stat
the engine has run long enough.
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003OJ
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-27, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY" .
Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may
come on.
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than
60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following
conditions.
SEF176Y
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-228, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003OK

OK or NG

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003OL
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

EC
D
PBIB2005E
<Reference data> E

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 F
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
G
H
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS003OM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I


DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693
Component Description NBS003VV
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sen-
sor. The sensor element of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the com-
bination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-
pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-

pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the air fuel ratio (A/F) sen-
sor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In
addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required
operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003VW

A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003VX
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
P0130
(Bank 1) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is constantly open or shorted.]
P0150 circuit
approx. 1.5V.
0150 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003VY
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
[VQ35DE]
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step. A
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. EC
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen.
C
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec D
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from

step 2. E
SEF576Z
7. Release accelerator pedal fully. F

NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
G
SEF577Z
I
8. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from J
step 6.
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”. K
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF578Z
M
Overall Function Check NBS003VZ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.

[VQ35DE]
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Make sure that no DTC is displayed.
If DTC is displayed, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003W0
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1418E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1419E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003W1

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB2190E

3. Check voltage between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 terminal 3
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and fuse K

L

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxy-
gen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003W2
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 A

EC

[VQ35DE]
Component Description NBS003V3
< air).

SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003V4

A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003V5
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
P0131
(Bank 1) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is constantly is open or shorted.]
P0151 circuit low voltage
approx. 0V.
(Bank 2)

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003V6
A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: EC
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. D
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-245, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
E
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine. F
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
SEF581Z G
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec H
Gear position Suitable position
NOTE: I
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4. J
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-245, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
K

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003V7
BANK 1
TBWM1418E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running] D
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running] F
● Idle speed
G

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1419E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003V8

H
I
PBIB2625E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB2190E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and fuse

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
C
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35 D
6 56
1 76
E
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58 F

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. G
Bank 1 Bank 2
H
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77 I
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58
J
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
Perform EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003V9


[VQ35DE]
A
Component Description NBS003VA
sor. The sensor element of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the com- EC
C
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
E
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the air fuel ratio (A/F) sen- F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003VB

I
J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003VC

K
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause L
P0132
(Bank 1) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit M
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is constantly is open or shorted.]
P0152 circuit high voltage
approx. 5V.
(Bank 2)

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003VD
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
nostic Procedure" .
restart engine.
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
onds.
SEF581Z

B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec
NOTE:
4.
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003VE
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1418E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1419E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003VF

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB2190E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and fuse K

L

[VQ35DE]
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003VG

EC

[VQ35DE]
Component Description NBS003W3
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sen-
sor. The sensor element of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is the
combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxy-
gen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
< air).

sor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003W4

A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003W5
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F sig-
nal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operat-
ing (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or
not.
P0133 ● Harness or connectors
0133 [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit
(Bank 1) is open or shorted.]
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
The response of the A/F signal computed by
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure
ECM from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal
P0153 circuit slow response
takes more than the specified time. ● Fuel injector
0153
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks
● Exhaust gas leaks
● PCV

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003W6
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. E
6. Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10. F
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
H
PBIB0756E
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be dis- I

a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
J
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
138, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . K
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E L

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to M
EC-138, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
RESULT”.
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.

[VQ35DE]
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
● Fuel injector
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
● PCV valve

5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
9. Select “Service $07” with GST and make sure that no DTC is displayed.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003W7
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1418E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1419E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003W8

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 A
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
EC
PBIB2200E
E
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3. F
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle. G
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.
H
PBIB1922E
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. L
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ35DE]
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-67, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? PBIB1565E

Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-305, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-317, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 6.

[VQ35DE]
EC
PBIB2190E
E
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
H
PBIB1683E
I
● 10A fuse K
L

[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

[VQ35DE]
11. CHECK PCV VALVE A
Refer to EC-51, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. EC
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 13.
13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 E

CAUTION: F
● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxy- G
>> INSPECTION END H

Removal and Installation NBS003W9

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . I

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description NBS003TZ
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2), after three way catalyst 1,

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003U0

HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003U1
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2162E
0137 (Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit is open
(Bank 1) or shorted)
Heated oxygen sensor The maximum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0157 2 circuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage.
● Fuel pressure
0157
(Bank 2) ● Fuel injector

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003U2
A
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
C
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera- D
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and E
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C F
(158°F). SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
G
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
H
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
PBIB2373E
NOTE: L
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-276, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check NBS003U3
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this PBIB1607E
procedure.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003U4
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1382E

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
74 LG/B – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1383E

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
6 R
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003U5

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
G
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
nector.
H
I
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? PBIB1565E
J
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-305, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL
K
No >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. M
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM
terminal 78.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. PBIB1576E

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 74 1 1
P0157 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 74 1 1
P0157 55 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003U6

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
SEF174Y

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A
EC
PBIB1672E
D
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2163E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. H
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 I
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
L
ground.
at least 10 times. M
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
position.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E
procedure.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003U7


DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description NBS003ON

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003OO

– Engine: After warming up G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004M8
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer switching time. I
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut. J
PBIB1848E
M
MALFUNCTION B
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2376E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
P0138 (Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit is
An excessively high voltage from the sen-
0138 A) open or shorted)
sor is sent to ECM.
(Bank 1)
● Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors
2 circuit high voltage (Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit is
P0158 open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is
0158 B) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
not reached to the specified voltage.
(Bank 2)
● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004M9

If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-282, "PROCEDURE FOR
MALFUNCTION A" . SEF174Y
With GST
With CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
CONSULT-II.
ture.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F). SEF174Y

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
A
EC
PBIB2372E D
NOTE:
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. E
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-282, "PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B" .
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). F
Overall Function Check NBS004MA
G
H
With GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] and J
ground.
at least 10 times. K
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure. L
essary.
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D M
position.
procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-282, "PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B" .

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003OR
BANK 1
TBWM1382E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
D
25 P
E
F
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm G
(bank 1)
– After keeping the engine speed between H
[Engine is running] I
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
J

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1383E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
6 R
E
F
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
J
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003OS

1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS K
L
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
terminal 78.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to ground
or short to power in harness or connectors.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A
>> INSPECTION END EC

1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS C

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . D
G
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. H

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-317, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
No >> GO TO 3.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
OK or NG

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1 C
P0158 55 1 2
Continuity should exist. D

E
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1 F
P0158 55 1 2
Continuity should not exist. G

OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 6.
K
L
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS003OT
M
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1672E
PBIB2163E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
CAUTION:
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
ground.
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003OU
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A

EC

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description NBS003OV

tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003OW

HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003OX

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst 1 causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
0139 (Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit is open
(Bank 1) or shorted)
Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0159 2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time.
● Fuel pressure
0159
(Bank 2) ● Fuel injector

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003OY
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
C
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
G
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
H
K
PBIB2374E
NOTE:
L
M
Overall Function Check NBS003OZ
WITH GST
ground.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
essary.
position.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec- PBIB1607E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003P0
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1382E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1383E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
6 R
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003P1

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
G
nector.
H
I
J
Yes or No
K
No >> GO TO 3.
L
M
terminal 78.
OK or NG

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003P2

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A
EC
PBIB1672E
D
PBIB2163E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. H
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 I
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
L
ground.
at least 10 times. M
procedure.
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003P3


DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003P4
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The EC
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection D
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
name
P0171 ● Intake air leaks
(Bank 1) F
● Fuel injector
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
Fuel injection system ● Exhaust gas leaks
too lean ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
P0174 ● Incorrect fuel pressure G
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
0174 ● Lack of fuel
(Bank 2)
● Incorrect PCV hose connection H
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003P5
NOTE: I
WITH CONSULT-II J
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- K
SULT-II.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. L
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-311, "Diagnostic M
Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, perform-
ing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF968Y
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

[VQ35DE]
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-311, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go PBIB1565E
to EC-311, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
utes. Refer to the table below.
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003P6
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1384E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 SEC984C
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1385E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003P7
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK A
1. Start engine and run it at idle.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1. EC
E
PBIB1922E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. I

[VQ35DE]
2. Disconnect corresponding air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
PBIB2190E

1 16
2 75
Bank 1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE A
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-87, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-635, "FUEL PUMP" .) E
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-87, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" )
● Fuel lines (Refer to FL-3, "Checking Fuel Lines" .)
● Fuel filter for clogging F
>> Repair or replace.

G
With CONSULT-II
H
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling I
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST J
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
K
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG L
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
OK (Without COUSULT-II)>>GO TO 8.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or M
ground. Refer to EC-188, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .

[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-628, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Disconnect harness connectors F50, F251
C
E
PBIB2624E
4. Check voltage between harness connector F50 terminal 5 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

5. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
7. Check harness continuity between harness connector F50 and
ECM as follows. H
Harness connector F50 PBIB2323E
Cylinder ECM terminal I
terminal
1 6 23
2 4 42 J
3 2 22
4 3 41
5 1 21 K
6 7 40
L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 9.

[VQ35DE]
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F251 as follows
and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Harness connector F251 terminal
Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 5 6
2 5 4
3 5 2
4 5 3
PBIB2497E
5 5 1
6 5 7
Operating sound should exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
4. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Remove fuel injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-45, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery.
6. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
7. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
8. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
9. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injec-
tors on bank 1.
tors on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003P8
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection D
Air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
name
P0172 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
0172
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector
(Bank 1) Fuel injection system F
● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 too rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
0175
(Bank 2) ● Mass air flow sensor G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003P9
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- J
SULT-II.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. K
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-323, "Diagnostic Proce- L
dure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, perform- M
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below.

[VQ35DE]
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-323, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
nector.
detected.
NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003PA
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1384E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 SEC984C
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1385E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003PB

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1. EC
E
PBIB1922E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
I

[VQ35DE]
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
PBIB2190E

1 16
Bank 1 2 75
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-87, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
>> Repair or replace. F

With CONSULT-II G
H
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
I
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. J
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
K
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8. L
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR M
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-628, "FUEL INJECTOR" .
PBIB0133E

[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect harness connector F50, F251
PBIB2624E

ECM as follows.
Cylinder ECM terminal
terminal
1 6 23
2 4 42
3 2 22
4 3 41
5 1 21
6 7 40

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

[VQ35DE]
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II A
EC
Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 6 C
2 4
3 2
5 D
4 3
PBIB2497E
5 1
6 7 E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR G
1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-45, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery. H
4. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors. I
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
J
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
K
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

M
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description NBS003PC
The fuel tank temperature (FTT) sensor is used to detect the fuel
temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage sig-
nal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensi-
tive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the
thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
PBIB1572E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003PD
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is (Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit is
Fuel tank temperature
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage sig- open or shorted)
sensor circuit range/
0181 nals from engine coolant temperature sensor
performance ● Fuel tank temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
● Unified meter and A/C amp.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003PE
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
If the result is NG, go to EC-331, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F). SEF174Y

[VQ35DE]
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. A
EC

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003PF
TBWM1386E

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003PG

E
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” G
Refer to DI-31, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" .

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Go to DI-21, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection" .
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- J
nector.
K
PBIB1572E
M
4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E

[VQ35DE]
● Harness connectors B1, M11
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect “unified meter and A/C amp.” harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and “unified meter and
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and “unified meter and A/C
amp.”
7. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003PH
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as EC
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
C
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
If NG, replace fuel level sensor unit. D
PBIB0931E
E
Removal and Installation NBS003PI

Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . F

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description NBS003PJ
The fuel tank temperature (FTT) sensor is used to detect the fuel
temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage sig-
nal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensi-
tive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the
thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
PBIB1572E
<Reference data>
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003PK
P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0182 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM. (Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit is
open or shorted.)
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Fuel tank temperature sensor
0183 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003PL
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003PM
EC
TBWM1386E

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003PN

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.”

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
PBIB1572E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E

[VQ35DE]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” EC
C
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. G
Check the following. H
amp.” I
J
Refer to EC-338, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. L
Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003PO

terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
If NG, replace fuel level sensor unit.
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation NBS003PP

Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

[VQ35DE]
A
Component Description NBS003PQ

PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003PR

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003PS H

I
J
● Accelerator pedal position sensor.
(APP sensor 2) K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. L

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 M
degrees.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003PT
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003PU
EC
TBWM0394E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003PV

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
EC
D
PBIB1557E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E H


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ35DE]
>> INSPECTION END
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003PW

5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and body ground under the following C
conditions.
69
F
step.
Removal and Installation NBS003PX

Refer to EM-24, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . H

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[VQ35DE]
FIRE PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003PY
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire
Multiple cylinder misfire.
0300 detected ● Improper spark plug
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire ● Insufficient compression
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 detected
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire ● Fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
0302 detected
● Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire
No. 3 cylinder misfires. ● Intake air leak
0303 detected
● Ignition signal circuit is open or shorted
No. 4 cylinder misfires. ● Lack of fuel
0304 detected
● Signal plate
No. 5 cylinder misfires. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
0305 detected
P0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire ● Incorrect PCV hose connection
0306 detected

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003PZ
A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE: EC
C
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
D
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. E
.
NOTE: F
ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E

G
time. Refer to table below.
H
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following condi-
tions should be satisfied at the same time.
I
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), J
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). K
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Refer to the following table.
L
Engine speed Time
Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes M
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003Q0
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace it.

With CONSULT-II
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIB0133E
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 10.

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
EC
2. Disconnect harness connectors F50, F251
C
E
PBIB2624E


ECM as follows. H
terminal
1 6 23
2 4 42 J
3 2 22
4 3 41
5 1 21 K
6 7 40
L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 6
2 4
3 2
5
4 3
PBIB2497E
5 1
6 7

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
3. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: C
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
sure applies again during the following procedure.
4. Start engine. D
pressure.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
7. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri-
cal discharge from the ignition coils. PBIB1603E
8. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be F

checked.
9. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
10. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. G
11. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure. H
12. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion. I
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION: J
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more. K
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7. M
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II

2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-649, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs
(Platinum-Tipped Type)" .
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9.
SEF156I
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
the grounded portion.
OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)" .
10. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-101, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-635, "FUEL PUMP" .)
● Fuel lines (Refer to MA-17, "Checking Fuel Lines" .)

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
13. CHECK IGNITION TIMING A
Check the following items. Refer to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
Items Specifications
EC
Target idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Follow the EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
D

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
14. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
PBIB2093E

1 16
2 75
Bank 1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

6. Also check harness for short to power or short to ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1.

FIRE
[VQ35DE]
16. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling EC
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST C
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. E
17. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART F
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-97, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 18.
H
18. ERASE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-67, "HOW TO ERASE I
>> GO TO 19. J

K
>> INSPECTION END L

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
Component Description NBS003Q1
The knock sensor (KS) is attached to the cylinder block. It senses

engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pres-
sure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
PBIB1564E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003Q2
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detected condition Possible cause
name
P0327 Knock sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0327 low input sent to ECM.
(Knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328 Knock sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Knock sensor
0328 high input sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003Q3
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003Q4
EC
TBWM0296E

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003Q5
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1564E

● Harness connectors F20, F252
● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ35DE]
Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
PBIB2625E
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 6.
F
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
G
2. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground.
Continuity should exist. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. I

J
● Harness connectors F102, M82 K
● Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors. L

M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003Q6
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003Q7
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-248, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
A
Component Description NBS003Q8
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctua- EC
tion of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change. C
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor D
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
PBIB0562E
the engine revolution.
E
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB2744E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003Q9 I

J
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer Almost the same speed as the tachometer
ENG SPEED
indication. indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003QA K
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal L
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking. ● Harness or connectors
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft [Crank shaft position sensor (POS) cir-
P0335 Crankshaft position cuit is open or shorted] M
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
0335 sensor (POS) circuit
while the engine is running. ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal ● Signal plate
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003QB
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003QC
EC
TBWM1387E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 1.6V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
13 Y
(POS)
Approximately 1.4V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1042E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003QD

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
D
PBIB1575E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0664E
H

I
● Harness connectors F102, M82 J
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
K
4. CHECK CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between CKP sensor (POS) and ground

[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003QE
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. EC
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
F
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-) G
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
H
I
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation NBS003QF
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) J

Refer to AT-270, "REMOVAL" .

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
Component Description NBS003QG
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction

of camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIB0562E
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
PBIB2744E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003QH

● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the Almost the same speed as the tachometer
ENG SPEED
tachometer indication. indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003QI
0340 ● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM [Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) cir-
(Bank 1) for the first few seconds during engine cuit is open or shorted]
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Camshaft position sen-
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM ● Camshaft (INT)
P0345 sor (PHASE) circuit
during engine running.
0345 ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-8 .)
(Bank 2) ● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-8 .)
● Dead (Weak) battery

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003QJ
A
NOTE:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II C
D
onds at idle speed.
. E
5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds. F
. SEF058Y
G
WITH GST
H

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003QK
BANK 1
TBWM1388E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
PBIB1039E
33 R/L
(PHASE) (bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm G
PBIB1040E
H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF I
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF J
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
K

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1389E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
PBIB1039E
14 BR
(PHASE) (bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
H
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003QL
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM J

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?
K
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. L
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-8, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS M

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
PBIB1568E

3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF481Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground

[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 (bank 1) or 14 (bank 2) and CMP sensor (PHASE)
terminal 2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. D
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. F
9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT) G

● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end H
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. I
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
J
SEC905C
K
Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L
>> INSPECTION END

M

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003QM
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
PBIB0563E

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation NBS003QN
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EM-83, "CAMSHAFT" .

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003QO
EC
PBIB1923E
E
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst 1 with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will
increase. F
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified
limit value, the three way catalyst 1 malfunction is diagnosed.
G
P0420 ● Three way catalyst 1 H
0420 ● Exhaust tube
(Bank 1) ● Three way catalyst 1 does not operate prop- ● Intake air leaks
Catalyst system effi- erly.
● Fuel injector I
P0430 ciency below threshold ● Three way catalyst 1 does not have enough
0430 oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
(Bank 2) ● Spark plug
J
● Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003QP
NOTE: K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
M
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF189Y

[VQ35DE]
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB1784E
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until

“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
PBIB1785E

13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
.
SEF535Z
Overall Function Check NBS003QQ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst 1. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank
1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-379, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB1108E

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003QR
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM A
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst 1.
PBIB1922E
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ35DE]
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injector, EC-629, "Wiring Dia-
gram" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-630, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB2250E
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector disconnected.
NOTE:
4. Start engine.
pressure.
8. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be

checked.
10. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
as shown in the figure.
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion.
CAUTION:
●Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
becomes 20kV or more.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.

[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II A
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and EC
the grounded metal portion.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-649, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . D
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG

Check the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace spark plug (s) with standard type one F
(s). For spark plug type ignition coil. Refer to MA-20,
"Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)" .
G
H
SEF156I

I
the grounded portion. J
OK or NG
K
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)" .
L
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-45, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery.
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

[VQ35DE]
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950
A
System Description NBS003QS
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform EC
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
H
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP I
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003QT
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
K
● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed L
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
● Loose, disconnected or improper con- M
EVAP control system does not operate prop- nection of rubber tube
P0441 EVAP control system erly, EVAP control system has a leak between ● Blocked rubber tube
0441 incorrect purge flow intake manifold and EVAP control system pres-
● Cracked EVAP canister
sure sensor.
solenoid valve circuit
● Blocked purge port
● EVAP canister vent control valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003QU
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

[VQ35DE]
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
PBIB0826E
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.

7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
385, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check NBS003QV
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
PBIB1109E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
Selector lever Any position other than P, N or R

[VQ35DE]
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second. A
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003QW
EC
C
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. D
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW E
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser- F
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
2. Start engine and let it idle. G
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG H
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum
I
100% Should exist.
0% Should not exist.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1678E
K
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW

L
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine. M
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.
6. Revving engine up to 2,000rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.

OK or NG
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR A
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. C
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION D

Refer to EC-429, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0452 and EC-435, "DTC Confirmation Procedure"
for DTC P0453.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 10.
F
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
G
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. H
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. J
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE K

Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.
M
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003QX
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
P0442
small leak detected control system does not operate prop-
0442 ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
(negative pressure) erly.
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
● Fuel tank temperature sensor
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
● EVAP canister is saturated with water
● Fuel level sensor and the circuit
● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
● ORVR system leaks

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A
the MIL may come on.
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003QY
NOTE: C
TESTING CONDITION:
D
● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). E
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met. G
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
H
I
PBIB2869E
J
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
K
PBIB0829E
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

[VQ35DE]
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-64, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-64, "Driving Pattern" .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
– If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-390, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
– If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" for DTC P0441.
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003QZ
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A
Refer to EC-42, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP C

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE D
DRAWING" .
PBIB2097E
J
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. K
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. L

[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-

sure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
PBIB1611E
F
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
●
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak H
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
SEF200U
K
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following. L
● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-43, "Removal and Installation" .
● EVAP canister vent control valve. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

[VQ35DE]
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
PBIB1031E

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E

[VQ35DE]
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Stop engine.
C
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. D
NG >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE E

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-107, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. F
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 17.
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
M
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.

[VQ35DE]
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-46, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE

Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to DI-24, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ35DE]
PFP:14920 A
Description NBS003WH
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Battery Battery voltage*1 D
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
E
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
F
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the H
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis- J
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K
SEF337U
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003WI


[VQ35DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003WJ
solenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the (EVAP canister purge volume control
EVAP canister purge solenoid valve is stuck open.)
P0443 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
volume control solenoid
0443 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is ● EVAP canister vent control valve
valve
completely closed. ● EVAP canister
● Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003WK
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
PBIB0839E
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
WITH GST
4. Select “Service $07” with GST.

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003WL
EC
TBWM1390E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
SEC990C
45 GY
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC991C
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003WM
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A
CUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. C
E
PBIB2097E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control F

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
PBIB0148E
I

J
● Harness connectors M82, F102 K
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
L
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR- M
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG

With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[VQ35DE]
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 13. C
PBIB1031E E

F
attached.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
H
I
J
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K

L
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003WN

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation NBS003WO

Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ35DE]
VALVE PFP:14920 A
Description NBS003R0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
C
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position E
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank F
Wheel sensor 2
Vehicle speed*
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP H
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
J
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
SEF337U
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003R1


VALVE
[VQ35DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003R2
(EVAP canister purge volume control
EVAP canister purge volume solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent
control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
0444 to ECM through the valve
open
solenoid valve
EVAP canister purge volume (EVAP canister purge volume control
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
shorted ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003R3
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

VALVE
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003R4
EC
TBWM1390E

VALVE
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
SEC990C
45 GY
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC991C
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

VALVE
[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003R5
CUIT
harness connector.
E
PBIB2097E

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
PBIB0148E
I

J
L
OK or NG

VALVE
[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003R6

With CONSULT-II
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between A and B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB0150E

VALVE
[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS003R7
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

EC

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935
Component Description NBS003R8
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System diagnosis.
PBIB1611E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003R9

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003RA
P0447 EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM (EVAP canister vent control valve circuit
0447 trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve. is open or shorted.)

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003RB
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
.
E
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003RC
TBWM1391E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE C
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003RD

D
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No E
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
F
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. H
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3. J
PBIB1679E K

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
PBIB1611E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0152E

● Harness connectors M11, B1
● Harness connectors B84, B216
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ35DE]
● Harness connectors B84, B216 EC
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
C

D
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 8.
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
H
Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I
>> INSPECTION END

J
Component Inspection NBS003RE

With CONSULT-II
K
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
L
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
M
PBIB1033E

[VQ35DE]
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If OK, go to next step. PBIB1679E
7. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E


[VQ35DE]
A
Component Description NBS003WP
ter and is used to seal the canister vent. EC
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative C
opened. D
PBIB1263E
E
H
PBIB1611E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003WQ

I
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003WR
K
● EVAP control system pressure sensor L
P0448 EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
0448 trol valve close closed under specified driving conditions. ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
M

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003WS
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5. Repeat next procedures three times.
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-422, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
PBIB0972E

WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003WT
EC
TBWM1391E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003WU
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE

PBIB1611E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1031E

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER A
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. C

Check the following. D
E
6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR F

2. Check connectors for water. G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 7.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 8.
K
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003WV
M
With CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E

[VQ35DE]
ON No
OFF Yes

7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Without CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes


DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365
A
Component Description NBS003RF
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases. EC
E
PBIB1611E
PBIB1207E I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003RG
Specification data are reference values. J

K
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003RH
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. L
Refer to EC-484, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause M
EVAP control system ● Harness or connectors
P0451 ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
pressure sensor perfor-
0451 control system pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
mance

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003RI
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003RJ

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER A
EC
PBIB1611E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water. E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
I
Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-430 .
>> INSPECTION END K

Component Inspection NBS003RK

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. L
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM M
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB1173E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

[VQ35DE]
Component Description NBS003RL
ECM increases as pressure increases.
PBIB1611E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003RM

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003RN
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
EVAP control system (EVAP control system pressure sensor
pressure sensor low circuit is open or shorted.)
0452 sent to ECM.
input

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003RO
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
D
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. E
.
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST H
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. I
5. Select Service $07 with GST. J
.
K
PBIB1110E

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003RP
TBWM1392E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pres- C
sure sensor
Sensor power supply
D
sure sensor)
[Engine is running]
E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003RQ
F
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . G
J
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR L

M
PBIB1611E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

E
● Harness connectors M82, F102 F

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. I
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

>> INSPECTION END K
Component Inspection NBS003RR
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. M
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
CAUTION:

[VQ35DE]
Component Description NBS003RS
PBIB1611E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003RT

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003RU
NOTE:
(EVAP control system pressure sensor
circuit is open or shorted.)
EVAP control system ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
pressure sensor high
0453 sent to ECM. ● EVAP canister vent control valve
input
● EVAP canister
● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003RV
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
.
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. H
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-437, "Diagnostic Procedure" J
.
K
PBIB1110E

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003RW
TBWM1392E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sure sensor
Sensor power supply
D
sure sensor)
[Engine is running]
E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003RX
F
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . G
J
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR L

M
PBIB1611E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

SHORT
67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VQ35DE]
SHORT
2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

E

H
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 11.
L
Refer to EC-441, "Component Inspection" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[VQ35DE]
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1031E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.


>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003RY
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A

2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC
C
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
D
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. E
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. F

[VQ35DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003RZ
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
EVAP control system has a very large leak ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system leaks
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control sys-
0455 gross leak detected
tem does not operate properly. ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
solenoid valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,

[VQ35DE]
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
A
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003S0
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. EC
NOTE:
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
C
TESTING CONDITION:
D
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures. E
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. F
CONSULT-II. G
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) H
PBIB2869E
J
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed. K
PBIB0829E
NOTE:

[VQ35DE]
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-444, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442 EC-390, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC763C
WITH GST
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-444, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-390, "Diagnostic Procedure" for DTC P0442.
● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" for DTC P0441.
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003S1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE C

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. E

F
>> GO TO 7. G
● EVAP canister vent control valve. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J

[VQ35DE]
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
sure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
PBIB2097E
SEF916U

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
PEF917U
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
SEF200U

[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
PBIB1611E
F
CAUTION:
●
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 12.
J
SEF200U
K
With CONSULT-II L
2. Start engine.
M
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1678E

[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

OK or NG

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

[VQ35DE]
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 19.
C
improper connection. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. G
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

>> INSPECTION END I

[VQ35DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003S2
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB1026E
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Evaporative emission ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
0456 small leak (negative ● EVAP system does not operate prop- ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
pressure check) erly. ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
NOTE: C
● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait D
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. E
● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour.
– Fuel filler cap is removed. F
– Fuel is refilled or drained.
– EVAP component parts is/are removed.
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. G
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with H
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) I
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool J
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output
voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then PBIB2870E
K
start from step 1).
4. Turn ignition switch ON. L
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
M
PBIB0837E

NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

[VQ35DE]
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Overall Function Check NBS003S4
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
● Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
vice port.
PBIB2097E
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.

3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
5. Connect GST and select Service $08.
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP SEF462UI
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
8. Disconnect GST.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.

[VQ35DE]
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN A

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. C
SEF915U
E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
J
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. L

[VQ35DE]
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-40, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING" .
PBIB2097E
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.

[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
CAUTION:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres- D

sure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
SEF200U
I

[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
PBIB1611E
CAUTION:
●
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

● EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

[VQ35DE]
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. C
PBIB1031E E

F
attached.
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 11. H

I
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection J

K
With CONSULT-II
L
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. M
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E

[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.

[VQ35DE]
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 21.
C
improper connection. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23. G
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. I

K
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description NBS003S6
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the “unified meter and A/C amp.”. The “unified meter and A/C amp.”
sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN commu-
nication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
PBIB1569E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003S7
NOTE:
● If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
● If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
shorted)
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal ● Harness or connectors
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor (Fuel level sensor circuit is open or
0460 noise
to ECM.
shorted)
● Fuel level sensor
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
1. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation NBS003SA E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

[VQ35DE]
Component Description NBS003SB
nication line.
PBIB1569E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003SC
NOTE:
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
shorted)
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even ● Harness or connectors
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis- (Fuel level sensor circuit is open or
tance. shorted)
Overall Function Check NBS003SD
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-10,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-86, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

[VQ35DE]
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT- A
II.
9. Touch ON and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) and stop it. EC
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. C
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during
step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. SEF195Y
If NG, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
WITH GST
NOTE: E
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
F
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-86, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. G
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. H
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
I
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003SE
1. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
L
M
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation NBS003SF
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description NBS003SG
nication line.
PBIB1569E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003SH
NOTE:
● If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0462 low input sent to ECM. (CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (Fuel level sensor circuit is open or
0463 high input sent to ECM. shorted)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003SI
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003SJ
1. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation NBS003SK E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

DTC P0500 VSS
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
Description NBS003SL
NOTE:
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” from the “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” by CAN communication line. The “unified meter and A/C amp.” then sends a signal to the ECM
by CAN communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003SM
(CAN communication line is open or shorted)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from (Vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM shorted)
0500 (VSS)
even when vehicle is being driven.
● Wheel sensor
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003SN
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
onds.
Selector lever Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF

. SEF196Y
Overall Function Check NBS003SO
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st

DTC P0500 VSS
[VQ35DE]
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels. A
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with EC
suitable gear position.
C
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003SP
1. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
D
Refer to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. E

F
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END G

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781
Description NBS003SQ
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003SR
Idle speed control sys- ● Electric throttle control actuator
P0506 The idle speed is less than the target idle
tem (ISC) RPM lower
0506 speed by 100 rpm or more. ● Intake air leak
than expected
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003SS
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform, EC-84, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-674,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003ST
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. C
2. REPLACE ECM
D
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of IVIS(NATS) system and registration of all IVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. E
5. Perform EC-84, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . F
G
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Description NBS003SU
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003SV
Idle speed control sys- ● Electric throttle control actuator

P0507 The idle speed is more than the target idle
tem (ISC) RPM higher ● Intake air leak
0507 speed by 200 rpm or more.
than expected ● PCV system
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003SW
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform, EC-84, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003SX
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
3. REPLACE ECM
F
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of IVIS(NATS) system and registration of all IVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. G
5. Perform EC-84, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . H
I
>> INSPECTION END

J

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Component Description NBS003SY
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
PBIB1579E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003SZ

● Engine: After warming up, idle Steering wheel: Not being turned. OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
the engine Steering wheel: Being turned. ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003T0
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

NOTE:
P0550 Power steering pres- An excessively low or high voltage from the (Power steering pressure sensor circuit
0550 sure sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM. is open or shorted)
● Power steering pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003T1
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003T2
EC
TBWM0302E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel: Being turned.
12 R/G
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel: Not being turned.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
sensor)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003T3

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness con-
nector.
D
PBIB1579E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. G
PBIB0188E H
3. CHECK POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace power steering pressure sensor.

[VQ35DE]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003T4
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E
Removal and Installation NBS003T5

Refer to PS-39, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .

DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
A
Component Description NBS003TI
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the EC
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
C
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003TJ
F
P0603 ECM power supply cir- ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
0603 cuit properly. open or shorted.]
● ECM G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003TK
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
J
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
K
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for four times.
.
L
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003TL
TBWM1393E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE C
121 R/W [Ignition switch OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003TM

D
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. G
H
MBIB0026E

I
● Harness connector E211, M41
● 20A fuse J
K

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
A
Component Description NBS003T6
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003T7
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605 G
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
I
● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
degrees) by the return spring.
Malfunction A
● ECM deactivates ICC operation.
J
● ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003T8
K
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE: L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A M
With CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
With GST

DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
ON.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
ON.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003T9
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ35DE]
2. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
Refer to BL-207, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . EC
5. Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . C
D
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:18919
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003UZ
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

Trouble diagnosis
name
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for
is shorted.)
0643 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high.
(APP sensor 1)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003V0
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003V1
EC
TBWM1400E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
sensor)
(APP sensor 1, ASCD steer-
ing switch, ICC steering
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 Y/R
106 OR

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003V2

E
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I G
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness

connector.
H
PBIB1580E
K
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
Voltage: Approximately 5V L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
M
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 90.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
● Harness for open between ECM and APP sensor
>> Repair open circuit.
5. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-663
68 PSP sensor terminal 1 EC-473
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-430
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-89, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .)
● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-476, "Component Inspection" .)
● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-427, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
7. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH PFP:23006
A
Component Description NBS003XZ
When the selector lever position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003Y0

C
Selector lever: Except above OFF D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003Y1
E
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) [Park/neutral position (PNP) switch cir-
P0850 Park/neutral position cuit is open or shorted.]
F
switch is not changed in the process of engine
0850 switch
starting and driving. ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003Y2
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions.
K
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
P or N position ON
Except above position OFF L

M
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF212Y

onds.
. SEF213Y

[VQ35DE]
Overall Function Check NBS003Y3
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Selector lever) Voltage V (Known-good data)
P or N position Approx. 0
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except above position
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0043E

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003Y4
EC
TBWM0521E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
102 LG/B PNP switch
● Except above position (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003Y5
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Refer to AT-40, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to SC-8, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 32.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and “unified meter and A/C amp.”.

[VQ35DE]
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 25.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
6. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III
1. Disconnect TCM harness connector. E
2. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8.
Refer to AT-107, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
8. REPLACE “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.”
Refer to DI-28, "UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP" . K
>> INSPECTION END

L

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL PFP:22690
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003U8

P1148 The closed loop control function for bank 1 ● Harness or connectors
1148 does not operate even when vehicle is driving [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
(Bank 1) Closed loop control in the specified condition.
open or shorted.]
P1168 function The closed loop control function for bank 2 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1168 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
(Bank 2) in the specified condition. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
NOTE:
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850
A
Description NBS003U9
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM. EC
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003UA C
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
D
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from unit)
TCS control unit E
1211 “ABS actuator and electric unit (Control unit)”.
● TCS related parts
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003UB

F
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II G
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. H
.
I
SEF058Y
K
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003UC L
Go to BRC-36, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM" .

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:47850
Description NBS003UD
NOTE:
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003UE
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
ECM can not receive the information (CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
P1212 TCS communication
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
1212 line ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
trol unit)”.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003UF
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003UG
Go to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
A
Description NBS003UH
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE: EC
● If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1010, first performed the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
Cooling Fan Control

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D
Battery Battery voltage*1 E
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R

control (Cooling fan relay)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature F
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
G
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant H
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
I
PBIB3254E

[VQ35DE]
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1 2 3
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) OFF ON OFF
Middle (MID) OFF OFF ON
High (HI) ON OFF ON
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan motor terminals
Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
2 3 and 4
Middle (MID)
1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under
middle speed condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003UI

the engine ON
OFF
(207°F) or less
between 98°C (208°F) and 99°C LOW
(210°F)
COOLING FAN the engine
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C MID
(219°F)
HI
(221°F) or more
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003UJ
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.

[VQ35DE]
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A
(Cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- ● IPDM E/R EC
heat). ● Cooling fan
● Cooling fan system does not operate prop-
● Radiator hose
P1217 Engine over tempera- erly (Overheat).
1217 ture (Overheat)
● Radiator C
● Engine coolant level was not added to the
system using the proper filling method. ● Radiator cap
● Engine coolant is not within the specified ● Water pump

range. ● Thermostat D
For more information, refer to EC-508,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
E
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to F
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, "Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
G
Overall Function Check NBS003UK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed. H
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator. I
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II J
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
K
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-503,
"PROCEDURE A" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-503, L
"PROCEDURE A" .
M
SEF621W
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-

SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-505, "PROCEDURE B" .
SEF646X

[VQ35DE]
WITH GST
"PROCEDURE A" .
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-503,
"PROCEDURE A" .
3. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors
operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test"
4. If NG, go to EC-505, "PROCEDURE B" . SEF621W

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003UL
EC
TBWM1399E

[VQ35DE]
TBWM0307E

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003UM
PROCEDURE A A
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3. C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- E
SULT-II.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed
(LOW/MID/HI). F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-505, "PRO- G
CEDURE B" .)
SEF784Z
H
3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active
Test" . J
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-505, "PROCEDURE B" .)
4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK L

Refer to CO-11, "LEAK CHECK" .
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump
5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Refer to CO-15, "Checking Radiator Cap" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.

[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace thermostat

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-508, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
PROCEDURE B
A
1. CHECK COOLILNG FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E6. EC
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 16 and ground with
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. D
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0966E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

● 40A fusible link G
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
3. CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT

I
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 15, 38, 60 and ground.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
L

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector.
PBIB1554E
2. Check voltage between cooling fan motor-1 terminals 1, 2 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1670E

● 40A fusible link
● Harness connectors E29, E121
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and battery
6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT-II

1. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 13,
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 10, 12.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and IPDM E/R

[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT-I A
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-2 terminals
3, 4 and ground. EC
Refer to Wiring diagram.
C
3. Also check harness short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. D
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1554E
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

F
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. G
10. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT-II

1. Check harness continuity between the following; H
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 8,
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 14.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11. K
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and IPDM E/R
M
12. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

[VQ35DE]
Main 12 Causes of Overheating NBS003UN
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-13, "Anti-Freeze
Coolant Mixture Ratio"
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level CO-11, "Changing
in reservoir tank and radi- Engine Coolant"
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-15, "Checking Radia-
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 tor Cap"
psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-11, "LEAK CHECK"
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-27, "WATER INLET
lower radiator hoses AND THERMOSTAT
ASSEMBLY"
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-497,
"DTC P1217 ENGINE
OVER TEMPERATURE"
).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving CO-11, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine Coolant"
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in CO-11, "Changing
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank Engine Coolant"
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-103, "Cylinder Head
gauge mum distortion (warping) Distortion"
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-123, "CYLINDER
tons walls or piston BLOCK"
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-7, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection NBS003UO
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
SEF734W

[VQ35DE]
Cooling fan motor terminals A

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
2 3 and 4 EC
Middle (MID)
1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4
C
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4
Cooling fan motor should operate.

If NG, replace cooling fan motor. D

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description NBS003UP

throttle position (TP) sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
PBIB0145E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003UQ

P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003UR
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003US
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A

2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside. D
E
PBIB1556E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

2. Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation NBS003UT

I

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
Component Description NBS003UU

throttle position (TP) sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
PBIB0145E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003UV

P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003UW
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003UX

2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. D
E
PBIB1556E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

2. Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation NBS003UY

I

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
Component Description NBS003WW
ICC steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of
switch, and determines which button is operated.
PBIB3255E
Refer to ACS-6, "DESCRIPTION" for the ICC function.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003WX

MAIN switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF
DISTANCE switch: Depressed ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003WY
● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

● The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
NOTE:
Refer to EC-481, "DTC P0605 ECM" .
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
● An excessively high voltage signal from the
ICC steering switch is sent to ECM.
(ICC steering switch circuit is open or
P1564 ● ECM detects that input signal from the ICC shorted.)
ICC steering switch
1564 steering switch is out of the specified range.
● ICC steering switch
● ECM detects that the ICC steering switch is
● ECM
stuck ON.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003WZ
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and
wait at least 10 seconds. D
5. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds,
then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release E
it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press DISTANCE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF058Y
F
8. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-517, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G
WITH GST
H

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003X0
TBWM0732E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor ground
(ICC steering switch)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] D
Approximately 4.3V
Approximately 0V E
Approximately 1.3V
● CANCEL switch: Pressed
99 G/Y ICC steering switch F
Approximately 3.7V
[Ignition switch: ON] G
Approximately 3.0V
Approximately 2.2V
● DISTANCE switch: Pressed H
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003X1
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS I

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . J
M
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW”, “DIST SW”
and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF MBIB0064E
RESUME/ACCELER- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ATE switch Released OFF
Pressed ON
SET/COAST switch SET SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
DISTANCE switch DIST SW
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press-
ing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4.3
Pressed Approx. 1.3
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELER- Pressed Approx. 3.7

ATE switch Released Approx. 4.3 PBIB0311E
Pressed Approx. 3.0

SET/COAST switch
Pressed Approx. 2.2
DISTANCE switch
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 82.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
E
F
● Combination switch (spiral cable)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
G
5. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
K
L
M
7. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace ICC steering switch.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003X2
ICC STEERING SWITCH

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector M203.
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) ter-
minals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 5,500
Pressed Approx. 310
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 2,600

switch Released Approx. 5,500 PBIB1621E
Pressed Approx. 1,400

SET/COAST switch
Pressed Approx. 740
DISTANCE switch
If NG, replace ICC steering switch.

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
A
Component Description NBS003X3
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated. EC
E
PBIB3255E
Refer to EC-36, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003X4

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION G
H
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON I
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON J
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003X5
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. K

NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. L
Refer to EC-481, "DTC P0605 ECM".
Trouble Diagnosis
Name M
● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM.
(ASCD steering switch circuit is open or
P1564 ASCD steering ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD shorted.)
1564 switch steering switch is out of the specified range.
● ASCD steering switch
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is
● ECM
stuck ON.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003X6
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release
it and wait at least 10 seconds.
and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF058Y

WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003X7
EC
TBWM0733E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(ASCD steering switch)
● Idle speed
Approximately 4.0V
Approximately 0V
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 3.0V
Approximately 2.0V
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003X8

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
C
Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF D
Pressed ON
Released OFF
E
RESUME/ACCELER- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ATE switch Released OFF
SEC006D
Pressed ON F
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-II G
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press- H
ing each button.
Pressed Approx. 0 I
MAIN switch
Pressed Approx. 1.0
CANCEL switch J
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 3.0

switch Released Approx. 4.0 PBIB0311E
K
Pressed Approx. 2.0
SET/COAST switch
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 82. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003X9

2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) ter-
minals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch

Pressed Approx. 660

SET/COAST switch

[VQ35DE]
If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.
A
EC

DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION PFP:18995
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003XA
NOTE:
● If DTC P1568 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-481, "DTC P0605 ECM"
● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
● The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
P1568 ECM detects a difference between signals (CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
ICC function
1568 from ICC unit is out of specified range. ● ICC unit
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003XB
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● Step 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Press MAIN switch on ICC steering switch.
4. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
5. Press SET/COAST switch.
PBIB2673E
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003XC
1. REPLACE ICC UNIT

1. Replace ICC unit.
2. Perform ACS-11, "ACTION TEST" .
3. Check DTC of ICC unit. Refer to ACS-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Component Description NBS003XD
When the brake pedal is depressed, ICC brake switch is turned OFF
and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the EC
brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
C
PBIB1539E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003XE

BRAKE SW1 ● Brake pedal: Fully released ON
(ICC brake switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
G
BRAKE SW2 ● Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
(Stop lamp switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003XF

H

I
NOTE:
J
● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. K
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
L
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h ● Harness or connectors
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (Stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ICC brake switch are sent to ● Harness or connectors
ECM at the same time. M
(ICC brake switch circuit is shorted.)
● Stop lamp switch
P1572
ICC brake switch ● ICC brake switch
1572
ICC brake switch signal is not sent to ECM
● ICC brake hold relay
B) for extremely long time while the vehicle is
driving ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
● Incorrect ICC brake switch installation
● ECM

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003XG
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights
up.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.

. PBIB2386E
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned vehicle speed.

WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003XH
EC
TBWM1401E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
108 SB ICC brake switch
● Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003XI
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION INDICATION
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON C
SEC013D
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V
G
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
PBIB1537E
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 12. J
3. CHECK DTC WITH ICC UNIT

Refer to ACS-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ICC brake hold relay.
PBIB1531E
4. Check voltage between ICC brake hold relay terminal 3 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1538E
5. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ICC brake switch harness connector.
PBIB1539E
4. Check voltage between ICC brake switch terminal 1 and ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0857E

[VQ35DE]
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E201
● 10A fuse EC
● Harness for open or short between ICC brake switch and fuse
C
7. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
D
2. Check harness continuity between ICC brake hold relay terminal 3 and ICC brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
8. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake switch. I
9. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
J
3. Check harness continuity between ICC brake hold relay terminal 4 and ECM terminal 108. K
Refer Wiring Diagram.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
M
NG >> GO TO 10.

● Harness for open or short between ICC brake hold relay and ECM
11. CHECK ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY

OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake hold relay.

[VQ35DE]
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
PBIB1539E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
14. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

[VQ35DE]
16. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. EC
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS003XJ
ICC BRAKE SWITCH E

3. Check continuity between ICC brake switch terminals 1 and 2 F
under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity
G
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
H
If NG, adjust ICC brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
I
STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. K
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist
L
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. M
PBIB1185E
ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between ICC brake hold relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 4, 6 and 7 under
the following conditions.
Condition Between terminals Continuity
12V direct current supply 3 and 4 Should not exist

between terminals 1 and 2 6 and 7 Should exist
3 and 4 Should exist
No current supply
6 and 7 Should not exist
3. If NG, replace ICC brake hold relay.

MBIB0063E

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description NBS003XK
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-36, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
PBIB1605E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003XL

BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal: Fully released ON

(ASCD brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003XM

NOTE:
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h ● Harness or connectors
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (Stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent ● Harness or connectors
to ECM at the same time.
(ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
P1572 ● Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch
1572
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ● ASCD brake switch
B) ECM for extremely long time while the vehi- ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
cle is driving
● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
● ECM

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003XN
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be C
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. E
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights
up. F
following condition.
G
H
. PBIB2386E
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. I

Selector lever Suitable position J
the above-mentioned vehicle speed. K
WITH GST
L

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003XO
TBWM1402E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V) D
Approximately 0V
108 SB ASCD brake switch E
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003XP F

With CONSULT-II G
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. H
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
K
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
L
M
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0060E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 8.

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
PBIB1605E
E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0857E

● Fuse block (J/B) connector E201 J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
K
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch

[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

PBIB1605E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

[VQ35DE]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch EC
C
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection" D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. E

>> INSPECTION END

G
Component Inspection NBS003XQ
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. I
J
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. K
SEC023D
L
STOP LAMP SWITCH
M

PBIB1185E

DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
Component Description NBS003XR
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from “unified meter and
A/C amp.”, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ICC
control. Refer to ACS-6, "DESCRIPTION" for ICC functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003XS

NOTE:
Refer to EC-466, "DTC P0500 VSS" .
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
P1574 ICC vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range.
● Wheel sensor
● TCM
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003XT
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).
PBIB2673E
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003XU
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-40, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
E
3. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP”
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . F
>> INSPECTION END

G

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
Component Description NBS003XV
A/C amp.”, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-36, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003XW

NOTE:
Refer to EC-466, "DTC P0500 VSS"
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range.
● Wheel sensor
● TCM
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003XX
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB2673E
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003XY
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
E
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . F
>> INSPECTION END

G

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:31935
Description NBS004MB
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this
signal for engine control.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004MC

Almost the same speed as the
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)
tachometer indication
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004MD
NOTE:
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340 or P0345 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0340 or P0345. Refer to EC-368, "DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" .
The MIL will not lights up for this diagnosis.
Input speed sensor Turbine revolution sensor signal is differ- (CAN communication line is open or shorted)
P1715 (Turbine revolution sen- ent from the theoretical value calculated ● Harness or connectors
1715 sor) by ECM from revolution sensor signal (Turbine revolution sensor circuit is open or
(TCM output) and engine rpm signal. shorted)
● TCM
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004ME

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to AT-44, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Description NBS003Y6
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003Y7

C
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003Y8
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. E
● Harness or connectors F
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
Brake switch shorted.)
1805 extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor. I
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration J
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003Y9
NOTE: K
WITH CONSULT-II L
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
M
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003YA
TBWM1403E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003YB
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. F
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
G
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

L
PBIB1605E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground M

PBIB1184E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop
lamp switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1605E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003YC
STOP LAMP SWITCH A

EC
D
PBIB1605E
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 E

Conditions Continuity
F
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, G

PBIB1185E H

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[VQ35DE]
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
Component Description NBS004IY
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004IZ

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004J0

P2100 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2100 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
● Throttle control motor relay
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2103 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up.
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004J1
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST

[VQ35DE]
TESTING CONDITION: A
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
EC
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-559, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C
SEF058Y
With GST F

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004J2
TBWM1397E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V D
4 L/W E
PBIB1104E F
0 - 14V

G
5 L/B
(Open) ● Selector lever: D
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed H
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] I
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) J
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004J3
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K

CONSULT-II or tester. L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

4. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

lowing conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6. MBIB0028E
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

[VQ35DE]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R EC
C
Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" . E

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[VQ35DE]
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
Description NBS004IR
NOTE:
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or 2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100
or P2119. Refer to EC-556, "DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" or EC-573,
"DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" .
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004IS

P2101 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
2101 performance ate properly. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004IT
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when the
engine is running.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004IU
EC
TBWM1396E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L/W
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 L/OR Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF]
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004IV

1. Turn ignition switch OFF
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I A
EC
Battery voltage C
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. D
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II E

F
Refer to Wiring Diagram. G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
I
K
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1171E

[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

8. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
3
4 Should exist
5 Should exist PBIB1557E
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

[VQ35DE]
1. Remove the intake air duct.
the housing. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle C
control actuator inside.
PBIB1556E
E
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14. G
Refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I

J
3. Perform EC-84, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004IW
L
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. M
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]

3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB0095E
Removal and Installation NBS004IX


DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
Component Description NBS004J4
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004J5

P2118 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004J6
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004J7
EC
TBWM1398E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L/W
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004J8

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
ECM terminal Continuity C
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
3
4 Should exist D
5 Should exist PBIB1557E
6
4 Should not exist
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K

2. Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . L
>> INSPECTION END M
Component Inspection NBS004J9

2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
step.
PBIB0095E

[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation NBS004JA


DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description NBS003TV
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003TW
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D
Electric throttle control actuator does not func- E
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion.
P2119 Electric throttle control
2119 actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B) F
not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode H
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. I
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003TX
NOTE:
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform K
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. M
3. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to P position.
ON.
SEF058Y
With GST

[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
4. Shift selector lever to P or N position.
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003TY
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1556E

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description NBS003YD
The accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor is installed on the upper

end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the EC
accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003YE
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V H

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003YF J

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. K
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
Accelerator pedal posi-
P2122 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen- ● Harness or connectors
tion sensor 1 circuit low
2122 sor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
input
shorted.) M
P2123 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
tion sensor 1 circuit high
2123 sor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1)
input
FAIL-SAFE MODE
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003YG
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003YH
EC
TBWM1404E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 Y/R
106 OR
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003YI

PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
connector.
D
PBIB1580E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0914E H

● Harness for open or short between ECM and APP sensor
J
4. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITON SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003YJ
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR A

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- EC
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
C
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V D
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V E
MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

F
Removal and Installation NBS003YK G
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
H

[VQ35DE]
Component Description NBS003YL

end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003YM


ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003YN

Accelerator pedal posi- ● Harness or connectors
P2127 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
tion sensor 2 circuit low (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
2127 sor 2 is sent to ECM.
input shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2128 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- (APP sensor 2)
input ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003YO
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003YP
TBWM1405E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply C
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
82 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 Y/R
sensor 2
H
I
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released J
106 OR
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed K
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003YQ
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body, Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . M
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK ACCLERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
connector.
PBIB1580E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0915E
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

Refer to wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. EC
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR C

1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
D
>> INSPECTION END E
8. CHECK ACCLERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9. I

J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and APP sensor K
L
10. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.


[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS003YR
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
conditions.
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

MBIB0023E

Removal and Installation NBS003YS
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
A
Component Description NBS003YT

PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003YU

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003YV H

I
● Harness or connector
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted). J
P2135
circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 ● Electric throttle control actuator
mance and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
● Accelerator pedal position sensor. K
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
M
degrees.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003YW
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003YX
EC
TBWM0406E

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003YY

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body.
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-1 A
EC
D
PBIB1557E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4,
ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003YZ

4. Set selector lever to D.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1signal),
69 (TP sensor 2signal) and ground under the following condi- C
tions.
69
F
step.
Removal and Installation NBS003Z0

Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . H

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description NBS003Z1

end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the
signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003Z2


ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003Z3

NOTE:
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2138
tion sensor circuit compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
range/performance and APP sensor 2.
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003Z4
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003Z5
TBWM1406E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
82 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 Y/R
sensor 2
H
I
106 OR
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003Z6

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . M
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector.
PBIB1580E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 6 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E

4. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with
1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0915E

[VQ35DE]
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. D

Check the following. E
F
7. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III G

● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. H

91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-584 I
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 9.
M
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ35DE]
10. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor terminals 3 and ECM terminal 82,
APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

12. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5,
ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

[VQ35DE]
15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A
3. Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . EC
C
>> INSPECTION END

D
>> INSPECTION END E
Component Inspection NBS003Z7

F
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- G
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage H
I
MBIB0023E
J
6. Perform EC-84, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . K
Removal and Installation NBS003Z8
L
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
M

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ35DE]
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693
Component Description NBS003VH
< air).

SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003VI

A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS003VJ
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is mon-
itored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
P2A00 ● The output voltage computed by ECM from the ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
2A00 air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 the lean side for a specified period.
● Fuel pressure
P2A03 lean shift monitoring ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to the ● Fuel injector
2A03
(Bank 2) rich side for a specified period. ● Intake air leaks

[VQ35DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS003VK
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- D
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. E
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. F
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
utes.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-609, "Diagnostic Procedure" G
.
SEF968Y
WITH GST H
I
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- J
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
K
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. L
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. PBIB1565E
utes. M
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-609, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003VL
BANK 1
TBWM1418E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G

[VQ35DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1419E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003VM

H
I
PBIB2625E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ35DE]
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
PBIB2200E
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. C
D
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
H
nector.
I
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J

K
Yes or No
L
No >> GO TO 5.

[VQ35DE]
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
PBIB2200E
3. Check harness connector for water.

Water should not exit.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

PBIB2190E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E

[VQ35DE]
● IPDM E/R harness connector E7 EC
● 10A fuse
C
8. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
F
1 16
2 75 G
Bank1
5 35
6 56
H
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57 I
6 58
Continuity should exist. J

K
Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76 L
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
M
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.

[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 12.
12. CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA

2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR”
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB3202E

[VQ35DE]
13. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. A
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
H
nector.
I
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J
>> GO TO 14. PBIB1565E
K
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” L
M
>> INSPECTION END
PBIB3202E
Removal and Installation NBS003VN


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description NBS00402

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
Refer to EC-36, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
PBIB1089E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS00403

BRAKE SW 1 ● Brake pedal: Fully released ON

(ASCD brake switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW 2 ● Brake pedal: Fully released OFF


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS00404
EC
TBWM1411E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
108 SB ASCD brake switch
Diagnostic Procedure NBS00405

With CONSULT-II
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
SEC013D E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
G
I
MBIB0060E
OK or NG J
NG >> GO TO 8.
K

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1605E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short power in harness or connectors.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. EC
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C

D
PBIB1605E
G

with CONSULT -II or tester. H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1184E
K
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E201 L
● 10A fuse
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS00406
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

SEC023D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist.

PBIB1185E

ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ35DE]
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
A
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE, SET,
and is integrated in combination meter. EC
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
C
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of
ASCD setting.
D
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS00408 E
Specification data are reference value.
F
● ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed
at the 1st time → at the 2nd time
G
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is
between 40km/h (25MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF
and 144km/h (89MPH)
H

ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ35DE]
TBWM1412E

ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0040A
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.

ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION EC
● MAIN switch: pressed at the 1st
time → at the 2nd time
C

between 40km/h (25MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF
and 144km/h (89MPH) D
OK or NG
E
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC
F
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-34, "DTC [B2202] Meter Communication Circuit" .
J
K
>> INSPECTION END

L

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
Description NBS003ZU
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line
from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003ZV

Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan: Operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003ZW
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions.
Condition Indication
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0103E

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION A
Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II under the following conditions.
EC
Heater fan: Operating ON
Heater fan: Not operating OFF C
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6. D
PBIB1995E
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM E
Refer to GW-67, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .

F
>> INSPECTION END
5. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM G

Refer to LT-7, "HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -" .
>> INSPECTION END H
6. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM

I
Refer to ATC-40, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
J
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ35DE]
FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
Component Description NBS003ZE
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the Ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the fuel injection pulse
duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003ZF

● No load

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003ZG
EC
TBWM1408E

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 at idle
SEC984C
23 R Fuel injector No. 1
40 LG Fuel injector No. 6 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
42 P Fuel injector No. 2
[Engine is running]
SEC985C
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003ZH
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Disconnect harness connector F50, F251
C
E
PBIB2624E


ECM as follows. H
terminal
1 6 23
2 4 42 J
3 2 22
4 3 41
5 1 21 K
6 7 40
L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between harness connector F50 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between harness connector F50 and ECM

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ35DE]
Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 6
2 4
3 2
5
4 3
PBIB2497E
5 1
6 7

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
PBIB1561E

4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB0582E

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ35DE]
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 EC
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
C
8. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
H
● Harness connectors F251, F50 I
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and ECM
J
10. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. L
NG >> Replace fuel injector.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M

>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003ZI
FUEL INJECTOR
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation NBS003ZJ
FUEL INJECTOR

FUEL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
A
Description NBS003ZK
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage* C
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
D
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump E
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. F
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
G
Except as shown above Stops.
H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
K
PBIB1569E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003ZL
Specification data are reference values. L

● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON M
● Except above conditions OFF

FUEL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003ZM
TBWM1409E

FUEL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON] C
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
E
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003ZN

F
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed G
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
H
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1612E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I J

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E

FUEL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ECM terminal 113.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

nector.
PBIB1572E
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second
after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0795E

FUEL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
6. CHECK 15A FUSE A
3. Check 15A fuse. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse. C
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

D
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” termi-
nal 1. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8. G

H
● Harness connectors E206, B6
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” I
J
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

2. Also check harness for short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. M
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)"

FUEL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003ZO
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
terminals 1 and 3.
SEC918C
Removal and Installation NBS003ZP
FUEL PUMP

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
ICC BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Component Description NBS003ZX
and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the EC
brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
C
PBIB1539E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS003ZY

BRAKE SW1 ● Brake pedal: Fully released ON
(ICC brake switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
G
BRAKE SW2 ● Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003ZZ
TBWM1410E

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Approximately 0V
108 SB ICC brake switch E
Diagnostic Procedure NBS00400 F

With CONSULT-II G
SULT-II. H
CONDITION INDICATION I
J
SEC011D
K
Without CONSULT-II
L
CONDITION VOLTAGE M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
lowing conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
PBIB1537E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.

Refer to ACS-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
4. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT A
PBIB1531E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. G
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB1538E
5. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

2. Disconnect ICC brake switch harness connector. J
PBIB1539E M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0857E

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake switch.
3. Check harness continuity between ICC brake hold relay terminal 4 and ECM terminal 108.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.


OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake fold relay.

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
PBIB1539E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. G
NG >> GO TO 13.
H
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
K
14. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.


ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

>> INSPECTION END

ICC BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check continuity between ICC brake switch terminals 1 and 2
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ICC brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

SEC023D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist.

PBIB1185E

12V direct current supply 3 and 4 Should not exist.

between terminals 1 and 2 6 and 7 Should exist.
3 and 4 Should exist.
No current supply
6 and 7 Should not exist.

MBIB0063E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
A
Component Description NBS003Z9
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
PBIB1560E
F

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003ZA
TBWM1407E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B D
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turn- (11 - 14V)
ing ignition switch OFF
E
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
TBWM0735E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
60 PU Ignition signal No. 5 SEC986C
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.4V
F
[Engine is running]
SEC987C
H

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
TBWM0736E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
79 SB Ignition signal No. 6 SEC986C
81 OR Ignition signal No. 2 0.1 - 0.4V
F
[Engine is running]
SEC987C
H
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003ZB
I
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running? J
Yes or No
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. K
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION L

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. M
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
PBIB1186E
SEC986C
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-149, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
MBIB0034E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
PBIB1606E
E
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> GO TO 6.
H
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III I

J
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1.
Continuity should exist. K
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

● Harness for open or short between condenser and IPDM E/R

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser.
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
PBIB1560E

5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F65

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13. D

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground
F
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. J
NG >> GO TO 15.

L
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM
M
16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)"

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
Component Inspection NBS003ZC
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

CAUTION:
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. PBIB0847E

NOTE:
8. Start engine.
pressure.
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. PBIB1603E

checked.
generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
CAUTION:
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunc-
tioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ35DE]
CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. A
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
EC
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
PBIB0794E
E
Removal and Installation NBS003ZD

Refer to EM-42, "IGNITION COIL" . F

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ35DE]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
Component Description NBS003ZQ
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB2007E
PBIB2657E

[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS003ZR
EC
TBWM0312E

[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
Diagnostic Procedure NBS003ZS
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1188E

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ35DE]
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
EC
D
PBIB2007E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. G
PBIB0188E
H

I
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor J
K
5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

[VQ35DE]
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.


OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
Removal and Installation NBS003ZT

Refer to ATC-154, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
SNOW MODE SWITCH PFP:25310
A
Description NBS0040B
The snow mode switch signal is sent to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” from the snow mode switch. The
“unified meter and A/C amp.” then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. EC
The snow mode is used for driving or starting the vehicle on snowy roads or slippery areas. If the snow mode
is activated, the vehicle speed will not be accelerated immediately than your original pedal in due to avoid the
vehicle slip. In other words, ECM controls the rapid engine torque change by controlling the electric throttle
control actuator operating speed. C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode NBS0040C
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION D

E

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0040D
TBWM1415E

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0040E
1. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITICH OVERALL FUNCTION-I A

2. Select “SNOW MODE SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with EC
CONSULT-II.
3. Check “SNOW MODE SW” indication under the following condi-
tions. C
Snow mode switch: ON ON D
OK or NG
E
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITICH OVERALL FUNCTION-II F

2. Start engine.
G
3. Check the snow mode indicator in the snow mode switch under the following condition.
CONDITION INDICATOR
Snow mode switch: ON Illuminated
H
Snow mode switch: OFF Not illuminated

OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 7.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-28, "UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP" .
L
4. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
M
2. Disconnect snow mode switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between snow mode switch terminal 1 and
Voltage: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB2562E

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
● Fuse block (J/B) M1
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between snow mode switch and fuse.
6. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between snow mode switch terminal 4 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” termi-
nal 12. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body.
PBIB2625E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK SNOW MODE INDICATOR LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between snow mode switch terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VQ35DE]
9. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITCH A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. EC
NG >> Replace snow mode switch.

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS0040F
SNOW MODE SWITCH E

1. Check continuity between snow mode switch terminals 1 and 4
F
CONDITION CONTINUITY
Snow mode switch: ON Should exist.
Snow mode switch: OFF Should not exist. G
If NG, replace snow mode switch.
H
PBIB2563E
2. Check continuity between snow mode switch terminals 2 and 4 I

J
1 Should exist.
2 Should not exist.
K
If NG, replace snow mode switch.
PBIB2564E

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[VQ35DE]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
Wiring Diagram NBS0040G
TBWM1413E

[VQ35DE]
EC
TBWM1414E

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
Fuel Pressure NBS0040H
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NBS0040I
Target idle speed No load*1 (in P or N position) 650±50 rpm

Air conditioner: ON In P or N position 700 rpm or more
Ignition timing In P or N position 15° ± 5° BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions:
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value NBS0040J
Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

At idle 5 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor NBS0040K
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.2V*
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor NBS0040L

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor NBS0040M

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater NBS0040N
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater NBS0040O
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) NBS0040P

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) NBS0040Q

Throttle Control Motor NBS0040R
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω

[VQ35DE]
Fuel Injector NBS0040S
A
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump NBS0040T
EC

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE] PFP:00024
DTC No. Index NBS004JK
NOTE:
● If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-822, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*

U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) EC-822
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-836
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-836
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-843
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-843
P0051 0051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-836
P0052 0052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-836
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-843
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-843
P0122 0122 TP SEN2/CIRC EC-885
P0123 0123 TP SEN2/CIRC EC-885
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-892
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR EC-895
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-898
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-900
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-910
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-919
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-928
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-940
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-951

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*
GST*2
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-964 EC
P0150 0150 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-900
P0151 0151 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-910
P0152 0152 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-919 C
P0153 0153 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-928
P0157 0157 HO2S2 (B2) EC-940
D
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-951
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-964
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-975 E
F
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-997
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-1003 G
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1008
H
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1008
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-1015
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-1015 I
P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-1015 J
K
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-1025 L
M
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-1030
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-1049
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-1054

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*
GST*
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-1108
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-1116
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-1125
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-1127
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 EC-1131
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-1137
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-1142
P0605 0605 ECM EC-1146
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-1149
P0700 0700 TCM AT-111
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-112
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-134
P0717 0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-116
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 AT-118
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-125
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-127
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-129
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-1154
P1140 1140 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 EC-1159
P1145 1145 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 EC-1159
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-1169
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-1170
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-1171
EC-1187 (Models with ICC)
P1564 1564 ASCD SW
P1568 1568 ACC COMMAND VALUE*6 EC-1201
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-713
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED EC-1223
P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-141

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*
GST*2
P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-146 EC
P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-148
P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-150
P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-152 C
P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-154
P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-156
D
P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-158
P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-160
P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-162 E
P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-164
P1800 1800 VIAS S/V CIRC EC-1224
F
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-1229
P2101 2101 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-1240 G
P2118 2118 ETC MOT EC-1247
H
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR EC-1252
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1254
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1254 I
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1261
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1261
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-1268 J
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-1275
K
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. L
*6: Models with ICC. M

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
Alphabetical Index NBS004JL
NOTE:
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 EC-836
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 EC-836
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 EC-836
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 EC-836
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 EC-900
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 EC-910
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-919
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-928
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 EC-900
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 EC-910
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 EC-919
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 EC-928
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 AT-141
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-127
ACC COMMAND VALUE*6 P1568 1568 EC-1201

APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-1254
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-1254
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-1261
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 EC-1261
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-1275
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572
ASCD SW P1564 1564
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-134
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-1229

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-1030
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 EC-822

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*
GST*2
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-1183 EC
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 EC-1015 C
D
CYL 7 MISFIRE P0307 0307 EC-1015 E
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 AT-156
F
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 AT-154
ECM P0605 0605 EC-1146
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 EC-1142 G
H
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 EC-892
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-1171
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 EC-1252 I
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 EC-1240
ETC MOT P2118 2118 EC-1247
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 EC-1234 J
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 EC-1108
K
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 EC-1049
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 EC-1054
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 EC-1091 L
M
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 EC-1116
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 AT-152
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 AT-150
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 EC-997
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 EC-1125
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 EC-1127

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 AT-158
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 AT-160
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 EC-940
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-951
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-964
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 EC-940
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 EC-951
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 EC-964
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-843
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-843
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 EC-843
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 EC-843
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 AT-146
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 AT-148
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 EC-895
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 EC-1223
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 P1140 1140 EC-1159
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 P1145 1145 EC-1159
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-129
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 AT-164
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 AT-162
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-1015
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-713
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 EC-1154

INDEX FOR DTC
[VK45DE]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*
GST*2
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-112 EC
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 EC-1071 C
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-1137
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 EC-1149
D
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-125
TCM P0700 0700 AT-111
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 EC-1169 E
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-1170
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 EC-898
F
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-1008
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-1008
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-885 G
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-885
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-1268
H
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 AT-116
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 EC-1044 I
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 AT-118
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 EC-1131

J
VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 EC-1224 K
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. L
*6: Models with ICC.
M

PRECAUTIONS
[VK45DE]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NBS0040W
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover NBS004M1
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T NBS0040X
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-72, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

PRECAUTIONS
[VK45DE]
Precaution NBS0040Y
A
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
EC
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition C
switch is turned OFF.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable. D
SEF289H
● Do not disassemble ECM. E

● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis- F
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission- G
related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
PBIB1164E
H
I
– Test values
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it J
securely with a lever (2) as far as it will go as shown in the
figure.
– ECM (1)
K
– Loosen (A)
PBIB3223E M
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

PRECAUTIONS
[VK45DE]
● Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-771 .
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents. MEF040D
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),

crankshaft position sensor (POS).
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SEF217U
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF348N

PRECAUTIONS
[VK45DE]
● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown
in the figure. A
EC
PBIB1144E
D
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
E
G
PBIB1508E
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. H

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
I
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
K
SEF709Y
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

L
to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units. M
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.

PREPARATION
[VK45DE]
PREPARATION PFP:00002
Special Service Tools NBS004JM
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Tool name
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and

(J-33984-A) radiator filler neck
Radiator cap tester a: 28 (1.10) dia.
adapter b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor 2

(J-36471-A) with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
Heated oxygen
sensor wrench
S-NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio sensor 1

(J-38365) a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Heated oxygen
sensor wrench
S-NT636
(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure

Fuel pressure gauge
kit
LEC642
KV109E0010 Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester

(J-46209)
Break-out box
S-NT825
KV109E0080 Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester

(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
S-NT826

PREPARATION
[VK45DE]
Commercial Service Tools NBS004JN
A
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak EC

i.e.: (J-41416)
S-NT703
D
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
E
S-NT704
F
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure
G
H
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant

temperature sensor I
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads K

cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
i.e.: (J-43897-18) anti-seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: J-43897-18 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5
mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
L
b: J-43897-12 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25
mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
M
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-
907)
S-NT779

[VK45DE]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
System Diagram NBS00411
PBIB3220E

[VK45DE]
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System NBS004JO
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3 EC

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature C
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
D
Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
& mixture ratio Fuel injector
Battery Battery voltage* 3 control E
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
F
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) VDC/TCS operation command*2
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation G
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined J
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION K
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase> L
● During warm-up
● During acceleration M
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from N to D
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation

[VK45DE]
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F
sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to
EC-900 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret-
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the-
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

[VK45DE]
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
A
EC
PBIB0122E D
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used E
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
F
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all eight cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The eight fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper- H
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System NBS004JP
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART I

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 J

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature K
Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
L
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position M
Wheel sensor 1
Vehicle speed*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage

[VK45DE]
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) NBS004JQ

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel cut con-
Fuel injector
trol
Engine speed
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,400 rpm under no load (for example, the selector lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 1,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-691 .

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
[VK45DE]
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL PFP:23710
A
Input/Output Signal Chart NBS00415

Air conditioner switch 1 EC
Air conditioner ON signal*
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
Battery Battery voltage* 2 D
E
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. F
System Description NBS00416
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
G
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine. H
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. I
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
J

[VK45DE]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
Park/Neutral position (PNP) ASCD vehicle speed control
Gear position actuator
switch
TCM Powertrain revolution*
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE lamp and SET lamp in combination meter. If any malfunc-
tion occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE lamp in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET lamp in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is pressed
● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
● Brake pedal is depressed
● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position
● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
● TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.

[VK45DE]
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the A
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
EC
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch
is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
● Brake pedal is released C
● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
D

Refer to EC-1194 . E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-1211 and EC-1295 .
F
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-1229 .
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR G
Refer to EC-1234 , EC-1240 , EC-1247 and EC-1252 .
ASCD INDICATOR H
Refer to EC-1302 .

CAN COMMUNICATION
[VK45DE]
CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
Refer to LAN-27, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.

[VK45DE]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
A
Description NBS0041A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. I
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.

[VK45DE]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
PBIB3221E
: Vehicle front : From next page

1. Intake manifold collector 2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP service port
solenoid valve
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.

[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB1523E

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0041B
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB1044E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 ,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S

Refer to EC-1076 .
Refer to EC-1007 .
Refer to EC-1083 .
Refer to EC-1099 .

[VK45DE]
EVAP SERVICE PORT
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP A
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
SEF462UA
D
Removal and Installation NBS0041C
EVAP CANISTER E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
K
PBIB1628E

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. L
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
M
PBIB1030E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage NBS0041D
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.

[VK45DE]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
PEF838U
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure

indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
PEF917U
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-700, "EVAP-

ORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UA

[VK45DE]
3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP
system. A
EC
D
PBIB1522E
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). E
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-700, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
F

[VK45DE]
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) PFP:00032
System Description NBS0041E
PBIB1068E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
● Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
– Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
– Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-746, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
– Disconnect battery ground cable.
● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0041F
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
attached. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E

Yes or No
F
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB1031E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I

J
>> GO TO 4.

L

M
OK or NG

[VK45DE]
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
attached.
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1031E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

>> GO TO 4.

5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE

Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.

[VK45DE]
7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE C

Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I E
Check one-way valve for clogging.

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
G
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
H
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close. I
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
K
SEF665U
Component Inspection NBS0041G L

REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" . M
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.

[VK45DE]
PBIB1035E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" .
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
PBIB1035E

[VK45DE]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
A
Description NBS0041H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB0062E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. H

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV I
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. J
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not K
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
L
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection NBS0041I
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E

[VK45DE]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277

IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
[VK45DE]
IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) PFP:28591
A
Description NBS0041J
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on EC
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-205, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM-NATS)" . C
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is dis-
played before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II. D
● When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system
and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be SEF543X
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. E

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS)
initialization and all IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
F

[VK45DE]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
Introduction NBS004JR
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
Freeze 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
Frame data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × × —
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-756,
"Fail-Safe Chart" .)
Two Trip Detection Logic NBS004JS
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - × — — — — — × —
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — × — — × — —
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-715, "EMISSION-
— × — — × — — —
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION ITEMS" .)
Except above — — — × — × × —

[VK45DE]
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means A
EC
Emission-related Diagnostic Information NBS004JT
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS C

×:Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference D
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit Trip MIL
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 — — 1 × EC-819
E
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 4 — — 2 — EC-819
1001*
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 — — 1 × EC-822
NO DTC IS DETECTED. F
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — 8 —
Flashing*
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 × EC-824 G
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — — 2 × EC-824
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — × 2 × EC-836
H
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — × 2 × EC-836
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — × 2 × EC-843
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — × 2 × EC-843 I
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 — × 2 × EC-836
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 — × 2 × EC-836
J
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 — × 2 × EC-843
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 — × 2 × EC-843
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — — 2 × EC-851 K
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P0081 0081 — — 2 × EC-851
L

M
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-879
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-879
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-885
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-885
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 2 × EC-892
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-895
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-898
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — × 2 × EC-900
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — × 2 × EC-910
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — × 2 × EC-919
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × 2 × EC-928
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × × 2 × EC-940

[VK45DE]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × 2 × EC-951
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-964
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 — × 2 × EC-900
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 — × 2 × EC-910
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 — × 2 × EC-919
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 × × 2 × EC-928
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 × × 2 × EC-940
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × × 2 × EC-951
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × 2 × EC-964
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-997
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-1008
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-1008
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 7 MISFIRE P0307 0307 — — 2 × EC-1015
CYL 8 MISFIRE P0308 0308 — — 2 × EC-1015
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-1030
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-1037
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-1049
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-1054

[VK45DE]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference A
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — 2 × EC-1091 EC
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-1108 C
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*7 × 2 × EC-1116
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-1125 D
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-1127
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — 2 × EC-1129
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — 2 × EC-1129 E
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-1131

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-1133 F
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-1135
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-1137
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — — 2 × EC-1142 G
ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-1146
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — — 1 × EC-1149
H
TCM P0700 0700 — — 1 × AT-111
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × AT-112
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-134 I
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 — — 2 × AT-116
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 — — 2 × AT-118

J
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × AT-125
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × AT-127
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × AT-129 K
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — — 2 × EC-1154
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 P1140 1140 — — 2 × EC-1159
L
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 P1145 1145 — — 2 × EC-1159
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-1168
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — 1 × EC-1168 M
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — 2 — EC-1169
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — 2 — EC-1170
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-1171
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-1183
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-1185
EC-1187
(Models
with ICC)
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 —
EC-1194
(Models
with ASCD)
ACC COMMAND VALUE*6 P1568 1568 — — 1 — EC-1201

[VK45DE]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
EC-1202
(Models
with ICC)
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — 1 —
EC-1211
(Models
with ASCD)
EC-1219
(Models
with ICC)
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — 1 —
EC-1221
(Models
with ASCD)
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — EC-713
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 — — 2 — EC-1223
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — 1 × AT-141
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — 1 × AT-146
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — 1 × AT-148
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — 1 × AT-150
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 — — 1 × AT-152
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — 1 × AT-154
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — 1 × AT-156
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — 1 × AT-158
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — 1 × AT-160
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — 1 × AT-162
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — 1 × AT-164
VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 — — 2 — EC-1224
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-1229
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 — — 1 × EC-1234
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 — — 1 × EC-1240
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — — 1 × EC-1234
ETC MOT P2118 2118 — — 1 × EC-1247
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 — — 1 × EC-1252
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-1254
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-1254
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-1261
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-1261
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-1268
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-1275
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — × 2 × EC-1283
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P2A03 2A03 — × 2 × EC-1283
*6: Models with ICC.
*7: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.

[VK45DE]
*8: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-723, "How to Display SRT Status"
. A
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip EC
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required C
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd D
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-727, "HOW E
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-715, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. F
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. G
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-749, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Con-
firmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
H
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. I
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc. J
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. K
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. L
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if M
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E

[VK45DE]
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-783, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0308
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-727, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.

[VK45DE]
SRT item Performance Corresponding
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” A
(CONSULT-II indication) Priority* DTC No.
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
EC
HO2S 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153 C
D
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
E
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and F
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle G
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
H
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
I
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) J
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
K
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive L
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL ON)
M
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.

[VK45DE]
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
PBIB2320E
*1 EC-719, "How to Read DTC and 1st *2 EC-723, "How to Display SRT Sta- *3 EC-723, "How to Set SRT Code"
Trip DTC" tus"

[VK45DE]
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-II A
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the EC
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown in the fig-
C
ure.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
NOTE: SEF949Z
D
Though displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, “HO2S HTR” is not
SRT item.
WITH GST E
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be. F
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously. G
● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
M
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-720, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

[VK45DE]
Driving Pattern
PBIB2906E

[VK45DE]
● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc. A
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
EC
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
C
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. D
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1: E
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than F
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
G
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. H
Pattern 3:
● Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
● Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed I
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady- J
state driving.
● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again. K
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for PBIB2244E
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle L
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
M
Suggested Transmission Gear Position
Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.

[VK45DE]
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
Test value (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test limit Conversion
TID CID
P0420 01H 01H Max. 1/128
P0420 02H 81H Min. 1
CATALYST
P0430 03H 02H Max. 1/128
P0430 04H 82H Min. 1
EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2
EVAP
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV
SYSTEM
EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2
P0131 41H 8EH Min. 5mV
P0132 42H 0EH Max. 5mV
P2A00 43H 0EH Max. 0.002
P2A00 44H 8EH Min. 0.002
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 1)
P0133 45H 8EH Min. 0.002
P0130 46H 0EH Max. 5mV
P0130 47H 8EH Min. 5mV
P0133 48H 8EH Min. 0.002
P0151 4CH 8FH Min. 5mV
P0152 4DH 0FH Max. 5mV
P2A03 4EH 0FH Max. 0.002
P2A03 4FH 8FH Min. 0.002
HO2S Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 2)
P0153 50H 8FH Min. 0.002
P0150 51H 0FH Max. 5mV
P0150 52H 8FH Min. 5mV
P0153 53H 8FH Min. 0.002
P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500 ms
P0137 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV
P0138 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV
P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10mV
P0159 21H 87H Min. 10 mV/500 ms
P0157 22H 87H Min. 10 mV
P0158 23H 07H Max. 10 mV
P0158 24H 07H Max. 10mV

[VK45DE]
Test value (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test limit Conversion A
TID CID
P0032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
P0031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV EC
P0052 59H 11H Max. 5 mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)
HO2S P0051 5AH 91H Min. 5 mV
HEATER P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV C
P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV
P0058 2FH 0BH Max. 20 mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) D
P0057 30H 8BH Min. 20 mV
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION

E
How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. F
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu-
ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE: G
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-676, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. H
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” I
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
J
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
K

[VK45DE]
SCIA5671E
WITH GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-43, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
NO TOOLS
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-676, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-43, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-730, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

[VK45DE]
– Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all A
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) NBS004JU
EC
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
C
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-1360, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. D
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
E
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION F

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status G
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. H
Engine stopped
I
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

J
WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
K
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
L
● One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
M
Engine stopped
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means

[VK45DE]
MIL Flashing Without DTC
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-723, "How to Dis-
play SRT Status" .
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-723, "How to Display SRT Status" .
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-730, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-
38, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-1360, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.

[VK45DE]
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL A
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
EC
read a code.
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated L
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” is indicated by the number of eleven flashes. The length of time the
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second)
cycle. M
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-676, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
730, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart NBS004JV
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.

[VK45DE]
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-714, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
● The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction
occurs while counting, the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-734, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PAT-
TERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-736, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

[VK45DE]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
SEF392S
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.

[VK45DE]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.

[VK45DE]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
SEF393SD
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

[VK45DE]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).

[VK45DE]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
A
Basic Inspection NBS0041P
1. INSPECTION START
EC
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
C
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections D
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket E
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF. F

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
G
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
H
J
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load. K
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
M
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J

Refer to EC-742 .
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-742 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.

>> GO TO 6.

[VK45DE]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 7.
2. GO TO 4. C

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
Refer to EC-742 .
F
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-742 . G
OK or NG SEF174Y H
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
Check the Following.

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-1037 . J
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-1030 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. K
2. GO TO 4.
L
M
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-207, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-742 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB1487E

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.

>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Refer to EC-742 .
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-742 .
OK or NG SEF174Y
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

[VK45DE]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-742 .
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. C
NG >> GO TO 16.
PBIB1487E
E
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-203, "TIMING CHAIN" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. G
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-1037 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-1030 . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
J
2. GO TO 4.
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION K
this is a rare case.) L
M
>> GO TO 4.
19. INSPECTION END

Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-743, "VIN Registration" .
2. INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check NBS0041Q
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Attach timing light A to loop wire (1) as shown.
PBIB3242E
PBIB1487E
Method B
1. Remove ignition coil No. 6.
2. Connect ignition coil No. 6 (1) and spark plug No. 6 with suitable
high-tension wire A as shown, and attach timing light clamp B to
this wire.
PBIB3243E

[VK45DE]
EC
SEF166Y
D
G
PBIB1487E
VIN Registration NBS0041S H

DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: I
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II J
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-49, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
K
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display.
L
PBIB2242E
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning NBS0041T
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE

[VK45DE]
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning NBS0041U
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning NBS0041V
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
– With CONSULT-II: drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V.
– Without CONSULT-II: drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z

[VK45DE]
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
A
EC
SEF454Y
D
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci- E
dent by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. F
ITEM SPECIFICATION
G
MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
H
NOTE:
has a malfunction. I
J
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. L
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON. M
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.

[VK45DE]
ITEM SPECIFICATION
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-801, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
– Engine stalls.
– Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check NBS0041W
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
3. Start engine.
pressure.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pres-
sure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
PBIB1482E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
● Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because S50 models do not have fuel return system.
● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (J-44321) to check fuel pressure.

[VK45DE]
2. Install the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting A between fuel
damper (1) and fuel tube. A
3. Connect the fuel pressure gauge B (quick connector adapter
hose) to the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. EC
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
C
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. PBIB3244E
8. Check the following. D

● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging

E
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. F
If NG, repair or replace.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction NBS0041X
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-749 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-753 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence A
EC
PBIB2267E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Detailed Flow
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-752, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1 .
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
– Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
– Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-727, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-757 .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
results.
>> GO TO 5.

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
results.
>> GO TO 6.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
1 1
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-754, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order. C
NOTE:
● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure. E
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
F
No >> Check according to EC-811, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION

G
Perform EC-737, "Basic Inspection" .
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. H
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE I

With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CON- J
SULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-802, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
Are they within the SP value? K
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
L
SEF601Z
M
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-801, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-757, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symp-
tom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
28, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-795, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-771, "ECM Termi-
nals and Reference Value" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-727, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-727, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC-
724, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
MTBL0017

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
DTC Inspection Priority Chart NBS004JW
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● U1010 CAN communication
● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P0128 Thermostat function
● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
● P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P0605 ECM
● P0643 Sensor power supply
● P0700 TCM
● P1610 - P1615 NATS
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
A
2 ● P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EC
● P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring C
● P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor D
● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
● P0603 ECM power supply
● P0710 P0717 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772 E
P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
● P1140 P1145 Intake valve timing control position sensor
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) F
● P1805 Brake switch
● P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
● P2101 Electric throttle control function G
● P2118 Throttle control motor
3 ● P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
H
● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0308 Misfire
● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
I
● P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
● P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system J
● P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
● P1211 TCS control unit
● P1212 TCS communication line K
● P1564 ICC steering switch / ASCD steering switch
● P1568 ICC command value
● P1572 ICC brake switch / ASCD brake switch L
● P1574 ICC vehicle speed sensor / ASCD vehicle speed sensor
● P1715 Turbine revolution sensor
● P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve M
● P2119 Electric throttle control actuator

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Fail-Safe Chart NBS004JX
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
Condition
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 condition.
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
actuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2128 condition.
● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Symptom Matrix Chart NBS00420
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A

SYMPTOM

EC



C

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
D
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL E
F
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-1314
G
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-746
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EM-194
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-699 H
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-711
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-737 I
EC-1240,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-1252
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-737 J
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-1328
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-812
K
EC-858,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-867 ,
1
EC-879, L
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-892
EC-900,
3 EC-910 ,
A/F sensor 1 circuit EC-919 , M
1 2 2 2 2 2
EC-928 ,
EC-1283
EC-885,
EC-1008 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-1183 ,
EC-1185 ,
2 2 EC-1268
EC-1149,
EC-1254 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-1261 ,
EC-1275
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-1025
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-1030
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-1037
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-1131
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-1137

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

EC-1142,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-1146
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-851
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1154
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-1341
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-1305
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ATC-40
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 1 EC-1224
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 EC-1169
(continued on next page)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM


Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel tank FL-10
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-194
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
line, Low octane)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

Air Air duct EM-177 F
Air cleaner EM-177
Air leakage from air duct
G
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-177
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-179
H
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-179
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I
Generator circuit SC-20
Starter circuit 3 1 SC-8
Signal plate 6 EM-248 J
PNP switch 4 AT-112
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-232 K
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4 L
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-248
Connecting rod
M
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-203
mecha-
Camshaft EM-215
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-203
Intake valve
3 EM-203
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-183,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EX-3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- EM-187,
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion LU-31 , LU-
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 28 , LU-29
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-25

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Cooling CO-41,
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-45
Thermostat 5 CO-53
Water pump CO-51
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-36
Cooling fan CO-49
Coolant level (Low)/Contami- 5
CO-38
nated coolant
IVIS (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System — EC-713 or
1 1
NATS) BL-205

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Engine Control Component Parts Location NBS00421
EC
L
PBIB3224E
1. IPDM E/R 2. ICC brake hold relay 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor

(ICC models only) M
4. Intake valve timing control position 5. Intake valve timing control solenoid 6. Electric throttle control actuator
sensor (bank 2) valve (bank 2)
7. Cooling fan motor 8. Intake valve timing control solenoid 9. Intake valve timing control position
valve (bank 1) sensor (bank 1)
10. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 11. Mass air flow sensor 12. Ignition coil (with power transistor)
(with intake air temperature sensor) and spark plug (bank 1)
13. Vacuum tank 14. VIAS control solenoid valve 15. Engine coolant temperature sensor
16. Fuel injector (bank 1) 17. Power valve actuator 18. Knock sensor (bank 1)
19. Knock sensor (bank 2) 20. Fuel injector (bank 2) 21. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
22. EVAP service port 23. Ignition coil (with power transistor)
and spark plug (bank 2)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
PBIB3225E
: Vehicle front
1. Mass air flow sensor 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. Engine coolant temperature sensor
(with intake air temperature sensor)
4. Engine coolant temperature sensor 5. Knock sensor (bank 1) 6. Knock sensor (bank 2)
sub-harness connector
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3226E
: Vehicle front
1. Intake valve timing control position 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Intake valve timing control solenoid
sensor (bank 2) valve (bank 2) valve (bank 1)
4. Intake valve timing control position 5. Electric throttle control actuator 6. Condenser
sensor (bank 1)
7. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 8. Ignition coil (with power transistor)
(bank 2) (bank 1)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
PBIB3227E
: Vehicle front
1. Fuel injector (bank 2) 2. Fuel injector (bank 1) 3. VIAS control solenoid valve
4. Vacuum tank 5. Power valve actuator 6. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
7. EVAP service port 8. Cooling fan motor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3228E
: Vehicle front
1. Fuel pump fuse 2. IPDM E/R 3. ICC brake hold relay
(ICC models only)
4. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 5. Power steering pressure sensor 6. EVAP canister vent control valve
7. EVAP canister 8. EVAP control system pressure sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
PBIB2710E
PBIB3239E
1. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
harness connector
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 5. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 6. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3229E
1. ECM 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor 3. Stop lamp switch

4. ICC brake switch 5. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 6. ICC steering switch
(models with ICC) harness connector (models with ICC)
ASCD brake switch ASCD steering switch
(models with ASCD) (models with ASCD)
7. MAIN switch 8. DISTANCE switch 9. CANCEL switch
(ICC models only)
10. SET/COAST switch 11. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Vacuum Hose Drawing NBS00422
PBIB3222E
: Vehicle front : To EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

1. Intake manifold collector 2. Vacuum tank 3. VIAS control solenoid valve
4. Power valve actuator
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses.
Refer to EC-690, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Circuit Diagram NBS00423
EC
TBWM1319E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TBWM1320E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout NBS00424
EC
PBIB1192E D
ECM Terminals and Reference Value NBS00425
PREPARATION E
1. ECM (1) is located behind the passenger side instrument lower
panel. For this inspection, remove passenger side instrument
lower panel.
F
2. Remove ECM harness connector.
H
PBIB3240E
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen (A) it with

levers (2) as far as they will go as shown in the figure. I
● ECM (1)
● Fasten (B)
J
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
K
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
PBIB3223E
L
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. M
CAUTION:
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 P ● Warm-up condition
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
3 P [Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 14V

4 L/W
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
PBIB1105E
[Engine is running]
6 R
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
10 OR
solenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000rpm
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
11 BR
PBIB1790E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel: Being turned EC
12 R/G
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel: Not being turned
C
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed D
NOTE:
at idle E
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB1041E
13 Y
(POS)
1.0 - 2.0V
F
[Engine is running]
G
PBIB1042E
H
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed I
NOTE:
at idle
J
Camshaft position sensor PBIB1039E
14 W
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
K
[Engine is running]
L
PBIB1040E
[Engine is running] M
15 W Knock sensor (bank 1) Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
16 R Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
56 B Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 OR Approximately 2.3V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
22 R Fuel injector No. 3 at idle
PBIB0042E
40 PU Fuel injector No. 6
41 BR Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
44 OR Fuel injector No. 7
63 G Fuel injector No. 8 [Engine is running]
PBIB0043E
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
29 GY VIAS control solenoid valve ● Selector lever: D
(11 - 14V)
● Engine speed: Below 5,000 rpm
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor
Intake air temperature sen-
34 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sor
air temperature.
[Engine is running]
36 W Knock sensor (bank 2) Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed C
EVAP canister purge vol- PBIB0050E D

45 W
11 - 14V
E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
F
PBIB0051E
0 - 0.2V G
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
H
46 BR Ignition signal No. 7 NOTE:
60 SB Ignition signal No. 5 The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
61 L Ignition signal No. 3 at idle
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0044E
I
65 P Ignition signal No. 8
0.1 - 0.4V
79 LG Ignition signal No. 6
81 G Ignition signal No. 2 [Engine is running] J
K
PBIB0045E
Sensor power supply

47 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V L
Sensor power supply
48 L (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor) M
Sensor power supply
sor)
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 0 - 1.0V
● Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
53 R/L
position sensor (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
PBIB2046E
[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
68 SB (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower fan motor
switch: ON (Compressor operates)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 0 - 1.0V EC
● Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
C
72 BR
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000rpm D
PBIB2046E
E
73 GY [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
engine coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
F
Heated oxygen sensor 2 G
(bank 2)
for 1 minute under no load H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
● Idle speed I
(APP sensor 1 / ICC steer-
ing switch / ASCD steering J
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
83 G/OR ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V K
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V - Battery volt-
85 PU Data link connector L
● CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected age (11 - 14V)

86 P CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status. M
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
98 Y/R

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4.3V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 1.3V
ICC steering switch ● CANCEL switch: Pressed
99 G/Y
(models with ICC system) [Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 3.7V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2.2V
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
ASCD steering switch [Ignition switch: ON]

99 G/Y Approximately 1V
(models with ASCD system) ● CANCEL switch: Pressed
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
102 LG/B PNP switch
● Selector lever: Except above (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
106 OR
Fuel tank temperature sen-
107 PU/W [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature.
ICC brake switch (models Approximately 0V
witch ICC system) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
108 SB
ASCD brake switch (models [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
witch ASCD system) (11 - 14V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
109 W/L Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE EC
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF] D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON] E
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON] F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
115 B/R [Engine is running] G

117 R/Y [Ignition switch: ON] H
valve (11 - 14V)
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
I
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) NBS00426
FUNCTION
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
monitor
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
A
SELF-DIAGNOS- DTC & SRT

TIC RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA EC
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT C
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
× × × ×
(PHASE) D
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sen-
× × × × × E
sor
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 × × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×
F
Wheel sensor × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
Throttle position sensor × × × × G
Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × ×
EVAP control system pressure

× × × H
sensor
Intake air temperature sensor × × × ×
Knock sensor ×
I
× ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor

Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
J
signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × × K
Stop lamp switch × × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × × ×
Battery voltage × × L
Load signal × ×
Snow mode switch × ×
M
Intake valve timing control position
× × ×
sensor
Fuel level sensor × × ×
ICC steering switch × × ×
ASCD steering switch × × ×
ICC brake switch × × ×
ASCD brake switch × × ×

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
SELF-DIAGNOS- DTC & SRT
TIC RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Fuel injector × × ×
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×
Throttle control motor relay × × ×
Throttle control motor ×

EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × × ×
trol solenoid valve
Air conditioner relay × ×
OUTPUT
Fuel pump relay × × × ×

Cooling fan relay × × × ×
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 heater × × × ×*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × ×*3
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × × ×
valve
VIAS control solenoid valve × × × ×
Calculated load value × × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-720 .
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure" .
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
A
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● IGN SW ON EC
● ENGINE NOT RUNNING
● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS- C
TEM
● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS- D
TEM CLOSE”
● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT- E
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
F
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION ● IN THIS MODE VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM When registering VIN in ECM G
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
H
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE I

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-676, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
J
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
K
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-676, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
L
FUEL SYS-B1 ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) M
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] ● The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
● Indicates the engine speed computed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
sensor (POS) and camshaft position sen-
sor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value may
be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
sensor is displayed. value is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- value is indicated.
back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
● When the engine coolant temperature
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
COOLAN TEMP/S
× × mined by the signal voltage of the engine enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant
[°C] or [°F]
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. temperature determined by the ECM is
displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × ● The A/F signal computed from the input
signal of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is
A/F SEN1 (B2) [V] × displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) [V] × ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S2 (B2) [V] × sensor 2 is displayed.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:

×
[RICH/LEAN] RICH: means the amount of oxygen after
● When the engine is stopped, a certain
three way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) value is indicated.
× LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after
[RICH/LEAN] three way catalyst is relatively large.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE
× × vehicle speed signal sent from combina-
[km/h] or [mph]
tion meter is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× ×
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SENS2 signal is converted be
● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ECM internally. Thus, they differs from
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × signal voltage is displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by EC
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage
ECM internally. Thus, they differs from
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × is displayed.
● The fuel temperature (determined by the
FUEL T/TMP SE C
× signal voltage of the fuel tank tempera-
[°C] or [°F]
ture sensor) is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined
INT/A TEMP SE D
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air tem-
[°C] or [°F]
perature sensor) is indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES ● The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-
× E
[V] tem pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor
×
[V] is displayed.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] F
START SIGNAL computed by the ECM according to the ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
× ×
[ON/OFF] signals of engine speed and battery volt- played regardless of the starter signal.
age. G
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
CLSD THL POS
× × puted by ECM according to the accelera-
[ON/OFF]
tor pedal position sensor signal.
H
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
I
P/N POSI SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
× ×
[ON/OFF] park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
J
PW/ST SIGNAL system (determined by the signal voltage
× ×
[ON/OFF] of the power steering pressure sensor
signal) is indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the K
electrical load signal.
LOAD SIGNAL ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON
× ×
[ON/OFF] and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position. L
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch
and lighting switch are OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
× M
[ON/OFF] tion switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1
× ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
[msec] ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
width compensated by ECM according to
INJ PULSE-B2 computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
[msec]
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
×
[BTDC] ECM according to the input signals. value is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the
CAL/LD VALUE [%] value of the current air flow divided by
peak air flow.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the mass air flow computed by
MASS AIRFLOW
ECM according to the signal voltage of
[g·m/s]
the mass air flow sensor.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
INT/V TIM (B1)
[°CA] ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
INT/V TIM (B2) advanced angle.
[°CA]
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] ● The control value of the intake valve tim-
ing control solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signals) is
INT/V SOL (B2) [%] indicated.
● The advance angle becomes larger as
the value increases.
● The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indi-
VIAS S/V cated.
[ON/OFF] ● OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not
operating.
ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is oper-
ating.
● The air conditioner relay control condition
AIR COND RLY
× (determined by ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control con-
FUEL PUMP RLY
× dition determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals.
● The control condition of the EVAP canis-
ter vent control valve (determined by
VENT CONT/V ECM according to the input signals) is
[ON/OFF] indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
× control condition determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
● The control condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the
COOLING FAN input signals) is indicated.
[HI/MID/OFF] HI: High speed operation
MID: Middle speed operation
OFF: Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
HO2S2 HTR (B2) ECM according to the input signals.
[ON/OFF]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
I/P PULLY SPD ● Indicates the engine speed computed EC
[rpm] from the turbine revolution sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is
[km/h] or [MPH] C
displayed.
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle air volume learning has not D
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully. E
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
SNOW MODE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the F
[ON/OFF] snow mode switch signal.
A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control
[%] value computed by ECM according to the G
input signals.
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● The current flow to the heater becomes
[%]
larger as the value increases.
H
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE I
vehicle speed signal sent from combina-
[km/h] or [mph]
tion meter is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed. J
[km/h] or [mph]
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN
K
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN-
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal. L
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/
[ON/OFF] COAST switch signal.
M
BRAKE SW1 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
[ON/OFF] brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
DIST SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from DIS-
[ON/OFF] TANCE switch signal.
VHCL SPD CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed increased to exces-
sively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
LO SPEED CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to exces-
sively low compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
AT OD MONITOR
according to the input signal from the
[ON/OFF]
TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] cancel signal sent from the TCM.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
CRUISE LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET
SET LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
● Indicates the correction factor stored in
ECM.
A/F ADJ-B1 The factor is calculated from the differ-
A/F ADJ-B2 ence between the target air-fuel ratio
stored in ECM and the air-fuel ratio calcu-
lated form A/F sensor 1 signal.
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec], ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
[Hz] or [%] be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
width measured by the probe. They are the same figures as an actual
DUTY-LOW
piece of data which was just previously
PLS WIDTH-HI measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

Monitored Item
ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● Indicates the engine speed computed
ENG SPEED [rpm] × ×
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
× back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] ● This data also includes the data for the
cated.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. A
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
EC
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injector C
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● A/F sensor 1

D
trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Timing light: Set ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using
E
CONSULT-II.
● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors

the engine. ● Compression
F
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch: OFF ● Fuel injector
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever: N ● Power transistor
● Cut off each fuel injector signal ● Spark plug G
one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coil
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors

COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID” Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan motor H
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II. ● IPDM E/R

trouble condition Engine coolant temperature sen-
I
ENG COOLANT If trouble symptom disappears, see ●
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injector
J
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay K
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors L
VIAS SOL VALVE
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis- sound. ● Solenoid valve
ten to operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run M
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP
● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
SEN
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors
TROL/V ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and sound. ● Solenoid valve
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-720, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
P0442 EC-1054
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
P0455 EC-1108
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-1116
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-1063
PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-1049
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-928
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-900
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289 P0153 EC-928
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 P0150 EC-900
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-951
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-940
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-964
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 P0158 EC-951
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 P0157 EC-940
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 P0159 EC-964
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to S50 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description A
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): EC
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be C
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording D
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... E
PBIB1593E
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and F
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
G
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though H
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure
to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/
1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-28, "How to Perform
Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
PBIB0197E
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function NBS00427
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
SEF139P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
FUNCTION
Diagnostic service Function
A
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
EC
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-720, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP
FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored C
Service $03 DTCs
by ECM.
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) D
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
E
● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
F
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific com-
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
ponents/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related pow-
G
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) ertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving condi-
tions.
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When
this mode is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve can be closed. H
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
● Low ambient temperature
Service $08 — ● Low battery voltage I

● Engine running
● Ignition switch OFF
● Low fuel temperature J
● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID) K
as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle.
M
PBIB1503E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
SEF416S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor NBS00428
Remarks: A
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in EC
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
Almost the same speed as C
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-801, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . D
A/F ALPHA-B1
See EC-801, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B2
E
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1)
● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5 V
A/F SEN1 (B2)
F
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met.
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) 1.0V G
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
are met.
H
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
– Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
idle for 1 minute under no load I
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication
J
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V K
ACCEL SEN 2*
L
M
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF

CLSD THL POS
the engine ON
PW/ST SIGNAL

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and light-
OFF
ing switch: OFF
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 7° - 17° BTDC
IGN TIMING
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● No load
CAL/LD VALUE
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
PURG VOL C/V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm —
● No load
INT/V TIM (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● No load
INT/V SOL (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 50%
● No load
ON
● Engine speed: More than 5,000 rpm
VIAS S/V
● Selector lever: Except P or N
OFF
● Engine speed: Less than 5,000 rpm
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch: ON
ON
● Except above OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
A
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C EC
OFF
(201°F) or less
the engine Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN MID
95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF C
HI
(221°F) or more
D
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
E
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Almost the same speed as
the tachometer indication F
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as
VEHICLE SPEED
indication. the speedometer indication
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned 0 - 65,535 km G
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
ON. (0 - 40,723 miles)
Snow mode switch: OFF OFF H
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● Engine: Idle I
AC PRESS SEN ● Both air conditioner switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor oper- 1.0 - 4.0V
ates)
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as J
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. the speedometer indication
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed K
L
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: M
ON
Pressed
OFF
Released
(ICC/ASCD brake ● Ignition switch: ON
switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF

DISTANCE switch: Pressed ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89 MPH)
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode NBS004JY
A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
C
F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” G
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
H
PBIB2445E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VK45DE]
PBIB2099E

[VK45DE]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
A
Description NBS004JZ
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E
Testing Condition NBS004K0
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles) F

2
● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
G
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2 H
● Engine speed: Idle
*1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” (A/T
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). I
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
J
Inspection Procedure NBS004K1
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
K
1. Perform EC-737, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” L
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. M
SEF601Z

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004K2
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2268E

[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3214E

[VK45DE]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-801, "Testing Condition" .
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within
the SP value.
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1
minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3. PBIB2369E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2332E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VK45DE]
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL A
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE: EC
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C
dition.
>> INSPECTION END D

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-746, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-746, "FUEL PRESSURE F
CHECK" . GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
G
H
– Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
– Clogged fuel filter
– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-1314, "FUEL PUMP" .) I
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-746, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
J
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” K

1. Start engine.
each indication is within the SP value. L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9. M

2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

[VK45DE]
– Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-1328, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .)
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-1307, "FUEL INJECTOR" .)
– Intake air leakage
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-232, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
● For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-1284, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 16.

[VK45DE]
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” A
1. Start engine.
each indication is within the SP value. EC
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-757, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . C

D
OK or NG
E
F
G
PBIB2332E

H
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
– Engine oil level is too high
– Engine oil viscosity I
– Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
– Noise from engine
J
– Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
– Valve clearance malfunction
K
– Intake valve timing control function malfunction
– Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
L
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-867, "DTC
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
24. REPLACE ECM

1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of IVIS(NATS) system and registration of all IVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
>> GO TO 29.

[VK45DE]
25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
D
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the E
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30. I
J
PBIB2370E
28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct L
● Looseness of oil filler cap
● Disconnection of oil level gauge
● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve M
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts
● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.

OK or NG

[VK45DE]
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[VK45DE]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
A
Description NBS0042E
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. C
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow Situation D
2 The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
E
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0042F F

1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-727, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA- G
TION" .
>> GO TO 2. H
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

I
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT K
Perform GI-28, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. M
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-25, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

[VK45DE]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram NBS0042G
TBWM1321E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
109 W/L Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE D
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] E
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF] F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
115 B/R [Engine is running] G

120 R/B (11 - 14V) H
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0042H
1. INSPECTION START I
Start engine.
Is engine running?
J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. L
Voltage: Battery voltage M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
[VK45DE]
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-1328, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1514E

[VK45DE]
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground EC
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
C
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO E
12. PBIB1630E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

F
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 12. H
I
PBIB1191E
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V J

K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Continuity should exist. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. M
NG >> GO TO 11.


[VK45DE]
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

14. CHECK 20A FUSE

1. Disconnect 20A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

[VK45DE]
16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> GO TO 17. D

● Harness or connectors F102, M82
F
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G

OK or NG H
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. I

[VK45DE]
Ground Inspection NBS0042I
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
● Remove the ground bolt or screw.
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
● Clean as required to assure good contact.
● Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" .
PBIB1870E

[VK45DE]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
A
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0042K
D
Trouble diagnosis
name
U1000*1 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control E

1000*1 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
line ECM cannot communicate for more than the
U1001*2 ●
shorted)
specified time.
1001*2 F
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0042L

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0042M
TBWM1322E

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0042N
A
Go to LAN-3, "PRECAUTIONS" .
EC

[VK45DE]
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
Description NBS004K3
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004K4

U1010 Initializing CAN communication bus is mal-
CAN communication bus ● ECM
1010 functioning.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004K5
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004K6
1. INSPECTION START A
With CONSULT-II
C
D
With GST
2. Select Service $04 with GST. E
4. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END G
2. REPLACE ECM
H
1. Replace ECM.
I
5. Perform EC-744, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . J
>> INSPECTION END K

[VK45DE]
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
Description NBS0042O
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM function ECM Actuator
Engine speed
Intake valve timing control position sensor Intake valve timing signal Intake valve Intake valve timing control
timing control solenoid valve
PBIB3276E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing (IVT) control sole-
noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake
valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
Intake Valve Timing (IVT) control solenoid valve is activated by ON/
OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The IVT control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction
of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E

[VK45DE]
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor
Intake valve timing control position sensors are located in the front of A
cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2.
This sensor uses a Hall IC.
The cam position is determined by the intake camshaft sprocket con- EC
cave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake
valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing
according to drive conditions based on detected cam position.
C
SEF359Z
D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0042P
Specification data are reference values. E

F
● No load
G
INT/V SOL (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 50% H
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0042Q

I
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Detecting condition Possible cause
The alignment of the intake valve timing J
0011 A (Intake valve timing control solenoid
control has been misresistered.
(Bank 1) valve circuit is open or shorted.)
(Intake valve timing control position K
sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve L
Intake valve timing control ● Intake valve timing control position
performance sensor
P0021
There is a gap between angle of target ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
0021 B M
and phase-control angle degree.
(Bank 2) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Accumulation of debris to the signal
pick-up portion of the camshaft
sprocket
● Timing chain installation
● Foreign matter caught in the oil
groove for intake valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0042R
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075, P0081, P1140 or P1145, first perform the trou-
ble diagnosis for EC-851 or EC-1159 .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
With CONSULT-II
onds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving con-
ditions required for this test.)
PBIB0164E

onds.
ENG SPEED Idle
Selector lever P or N position
With GST
With CONSULT-II
onds.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving con-
ditions required for this test.)
PBIB0164E
.
With GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0042S
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1323E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
10 OR
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
72 BR
[Engine is running]
PBIB2046E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1324E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
11 BR
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
53 R/L
[Engine is running]
PBIB2046E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0042T
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
KG >> Go to LU-25, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .
PBIA8559J

[VK45DE]
Refer to EC-818, "Ground Inspection" . EC
E
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
H
PBIB1517E
K
3. Check voltage between intake valve timing control position sen-
sor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF509Y

● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and IPDM E/R

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between intake valve timing control position sensor terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ground
7. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
ECM terminal 72 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 1) terminal 2 or
ECM terminal 53 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 2) terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control position sensor.

[VK45DE]
9. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
PBIB1517E
E
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
H
PBIB0192E
I
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R.
K
11. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR L
OPEN AND SHORT
M
ECM terminal 10 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) terminal 1 or
ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

Check accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft sprocket. Refer to EM-215, "CAM-
SHAFT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal pick-up cutout of camshaft sprocket.

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-203, "TIMING CHAIN" .
No >> GO TO 17.
17. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Refer to EM-221, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS0042U
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR


[VK45DE]
A
EC
SEF362Z
D
5. Check resistance as shown below.
E
3 (+) - 1 (-)
2 (+) - 1 (-) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (-) F
6. If NG, replace intake valve timing control position sensor.
G
PBIB0194E

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. H
valve terminals as follows.
I
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω J
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)

If OK, go to next step. K
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid L

CAUTION: M
NOTE:
Removal and Installation NBS0042V
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR


[VK45DE]
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER PFP:22693
Description NBS004K7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004K8

A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004K9
P0031
0031 The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
circuit is out of the normal range.
1 heater control circuit open or shorted.)
low
0051 through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
P0032
0032 The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
circuit is out of the normal range.
1 heater control circuit shorted.)
P0052 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
high
0052 through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004KA
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004KB
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1371E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1372E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004KC

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3246E
E
: Vehicle front 1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
harness connector harness connector

3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
H
NG >> GO TO 3.
I
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J

● IPDM E/R connector E7 K
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse L

M
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) terminal 4 or
ECM terminal 24 and A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio sensor 1.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004KD
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation NBS004KE


[VK45DE]
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
A
Description NBS00434
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control C
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
D
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater E
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
F
● Engine: After warming up
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
G

H
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON I
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF J
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS00436
Trouble diagnosis K
name
P0037
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
L
sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
sensor 2 heater open or shorted.)
control circuit low
0057 through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2) M
P0038
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
P0058 control circuit high ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
0058 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS00437
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
4. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
. SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1325E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
6 R
[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1326E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
PBIB1534E
E
3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with
F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0969E
I
● IPDM E/R connector E7
● 10A fuse
K
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 6 3 1
P0057, P0058 25 3 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS0043A
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB0970E
Removal and Installation NBS0043B


[VK45DE]
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
A
Component Description NBS004AD
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. EC
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. C
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control D
position.
PBIB1842E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004AE

INT/V SOL (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 50%
G
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004AF H
P0075 I
(Bank 1) An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
P0081 solenoid valve circuit
valve. J
0081 ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004AG

K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004AH
BANK 1
TBWM1342E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed D
7 - 12V
10 OR
solenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running] E
F
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
J

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1343E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed D
7 - 12V
11 BR
solenoid valve (bank 2) [Engine is running] E
F
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
J

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004AI
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1517E

valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E

● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
ECM terminal 10 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) terminal 1 or
ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS004AJ
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E

valve terminals as follows. F
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] G
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H

I
moves as shown in the figure. J
CAUTION:
timing control solenoid valve. K
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control L
Removal and Installation NBS004AK

M

[VK45DE]
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description NBS0043C
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
the heat loss.
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIB1604E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0043D

CAL/LD VALUE
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0043E
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Mass air flow sensor
A)
under light load driving condition.
sensor
Mass air flow sensor cir-
P0101
cuit range/performance ● Harness or connectors
0101
problem (The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Intake air leaks
B)
under heavy load driving condition. ● Mass air flow sensor
sensor

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0043F
A
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A C
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
D
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
.
SEF174Y H
With GST
I
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-862, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
M
increases.
SEF243Y

[VK45DE]
onds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-862, "Diagnostic Procedure" PBIB0199E
.
Overall Function Check NBS0043G

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC
With GST
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “Service $01”.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0043H
EC
TBWM1327E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0043I
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.

● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
E
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (1) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. H
PBIB3230E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with K

Voltage: Battery voltage L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. M
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0043J

With CONSULT-II
ing conditions. C

1.0 - 1.3
1.6 - 2.0
PBIB2371E
4,000 rpm.
G

H

K
Without CONSULT-II
signal) and ground.
1.0 - 1.3
1.6 - 2.0
PBIB1106E
4,000 rpm.

[VK45DE]
Removal and Installation NBS0043K


[VK45DE]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
A
Component Description NBS0043L
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake EC
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
the heat loss. C
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. D
PBIB1604E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0043M

G
CAL/LD VALUE
● No load
H
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s I
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0043N

J
Trouble diagnosis
name K
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks L
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) M
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0043O
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST
With CONSULT-II
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
SEF058Y
With GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0043P
EC
TBWM1327E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0043Q
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.

● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
E
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (1) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. H
PBIB3230E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. M
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS0043R

With CONSULT-II
ing conditions.
1.0 - 1.3
1.6 - 2.0
PBIB2371E
4,000 rpm.

[VK45DE]
● Crushed air ducts A

EC

C
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. E
signal) and ground. F
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 G
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to H
1.6 - 2.0
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about I
4,000 rpm.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. J

K
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. L

6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. M
Removal and Installation NBS0043S


[VK45DE]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description NBS0043T
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIB1604E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0043U
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake air tempera-
ture sensor circuit
0112 sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
low input
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air tempera-
P0113 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Intake air temperature sensor
ture sensor circuit
0113 sent to ECM.
high input
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0043V
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y

[VK45DE]
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. A
EC

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0043W
TBWM0723E

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0043X

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. EC
PBIB2195E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
G
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
H
is built-into) (1) harness connector.
I
PBIB3230E
K
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and
ground.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. M
PBIB1169E

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS0043Y
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between intake air temperature terminals 5
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS0043Z


[VK45DE]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the EC
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases. C
SEF594K
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 H
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
CAUTION:
I
J
Trouble Diagnosis
Name K
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir-
0117 sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
cuit low input L
Engine coolant tem-
P0118 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
perature sensor cir-
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
Condition
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

[VK45DE]
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
EC
TBWM1328E

[VK45DE]

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
PBIB3231E
: Vehicle front 1. Engine coolant temperature sensor 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor
sub-harness connector

3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0080E

[VK45DE]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING RART A
● Harness connector F261, F24
● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor EC
C
4. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. G
● Harness connector F261, F24
● Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM
I
6. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 7.
L
M
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS00446

Refer to EM-232, "CYLINDER HEAD" .

[VK45DE]
A

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E

F
THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G

H

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) J
● Accelerator pedal position sensor K
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
M
degrees.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0044A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0044B
EC
TBWM1329E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0044C

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator (1) harness connec-
tor.
D
PBIB3232E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB3250E H


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VK45DE]
>> INSPECTION END
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0044D

69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi- C
tions.
69
F
step.
Removal and Installation NBS0044E

Refer to EM-179, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . H

[VK45DE]
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description NBS0044F
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-879 .
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0044G
● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not ● Harness or connectors
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed (High resistance in the circuit)
P0125 after starting the engine.
ant temperature for
0125 ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control. ● Thermostat

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0044H
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II C
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). D
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. E
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
.
SEF174Y
H
WITH GST
I
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0044I

J
K
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-53, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS0044J

PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS0044K

Refer to CO-53, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .

[VK45DE]
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description NBS0044L
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to EC
the ECM.
PBIB1604E
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359 G
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0044M
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
P0127 Intake air temperature (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. ● Intake air temperature sensor K
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0044N
NOTE: L
CAUTION: M
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.

[VK45DE]
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 90°C (194°F).
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con- SEF189Y
secutive seconds.
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0044O

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0044P
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor termi-
nals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
EC
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature C
sensor).
D
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
H
Removal and Installation NBS0044Q
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I


[VK45DE]
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION PFP:21200
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0044R
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
● Thermostat
The engine coolant temperature does not
P0128 ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though
0128 stat
the engine has run long enough.
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0044S
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-53, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .
Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may
come on.
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.

WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0044T

OK or NG

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0044U
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

EC
D
PBIB2005E
<Reference data> E

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 F
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
G
H
SEF012P
Removal and Installation NBS0044V
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

Refer to CO-53, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .

[VK45DE]
Component Description NBS004KF
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
< air).

gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004KG

A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004KH
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
P0130
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0150 circuit sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. shorted.)
0150 ● A/F sensor 1
(Bank 2)

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004KI
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. C
WITH CONSULT-II
D
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-906, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
F
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
G
Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
H
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from I

step 2.
SEF576Z
J
7. Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
K
M
SEF577Z

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6.
RESULT”.
SEF578Z

[VK45DE]
Overall Function Check NBS004KJ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
WITH GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Make sure that no DTC is displayed.
If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-906, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004KK
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1373E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1374E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004KL

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3246E
E
: Vehicle front 1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness con- 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness con-
nector nector

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
H
NG >> GO TO 3.
I
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

M

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Removal and Installation NBS004KM

EC

[VK45DE]
Component Description NBS004KN
< air).

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004KO

A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004KP
signal is not inordinately low.
P0131
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0151 circuit low voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. shorted.)
(Bank 2)

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004KQ
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. D
nostic Procedure" .
E
restart engine.
within 20 seconds after restarting engine. F
onds.
SEF581Z G
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec H
NOTE: I
4. J
WITH GST
K

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004KR
BANK 1
TBWM1373E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1374E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004KS

H
I
PBIB2195E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
PBIB3246E
nector nector

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. EC
C
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35 D
6 56
1 76
E
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58 F

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. G
Bank 1 Bank 2
H
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77 I
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58
J
5. Also check harness for short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-811, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Removal and Installation NBS004KT


[VK45DE]
A
Component Description NBS004KU
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a EC
C
< air).
E
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to F
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004KV

I
J
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004KW

K
signal is not inordinately high.
P0132
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or M
P0152 circuit high voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. shorted.)
(Bank 2)

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004KX
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
nostic Procedure" .
restart engine.
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
onds.
SEF581Z

NOTE:
4.
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004KY
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1373E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1374E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004KZ

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3246E
E
nector nector

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
H
NG >> GO TO 3.
I
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

M

[VK45DE]
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Removal and Installation NBS004L0

EC

[VK45DE]
< air).

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004L2

A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004L3
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com-
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
0133 (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
(Bank 1) shorted.)
● A/F sensor 1
● A/F sensor 1 heater
The response of the A/F signal computed by
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than
P0153 circuit slow response
the specified time. ● Fuel injector
0153
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks
● PCV

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004L4
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. E
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10. F
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
H
PBIB0756E
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be dis- I

for 10 seconds.
J
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
801, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . K
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E L

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to M
EC-801, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
RESULT”.
PBIB0758E

[VK45DE]
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If NG, check the following.
● Lack of fuel
● Fuel injector
● PCV valve

5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-934, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004L5
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1373E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1374E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004L6

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
1. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
EC
PBIB3239E
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) E
harness connector
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 5. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 6. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector F
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)

G
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK H

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). I
L
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector.
nector.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 6.

[VK45DE]
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
PBIB3246E
E
nector nector

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
NG >> GO TO 7.
I
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

M

[VK45DE]
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

[VK45DE]
11. CHECK PCV VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. EC
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 13.
13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 E

CAUTION: F
● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread G
>> INSPECTION END H

Removal and Installation NBS004L7

Refer to EM-183, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . I

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004L9

are met.
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) 1.0V
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004C8

between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2030E
1147 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
P1167 2 circuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
1167 ● Fuel injector
(Bank 2)

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004C9
A
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
C
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
G
H
PBIB2373E
NOTE: L
M

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Overall Function Check NBS004CA
WITH GST
ground.
at least 10 times.
procedure.
essary.
position.
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this PBIB2024E
procedure.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004CB
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1330E

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
6 R
[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1331E

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004CC

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector, and
G
nector.
H
I
J
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-975 .
K
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PBIB1534E

4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 55 1 1
P0157 74 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 55 1 1
P0157 74 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS004CD
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 E

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. F
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. H
SEF174Y
I
J
L
PBIB1672E
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. M
PBIB2163E
CAUTION:

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
ground.
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation NBS004CE

Refer to EM-183, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST"

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description NBS004LA

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004LB

are met.
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
– Engine: After warming up G
HO2S2 (B2) 1.0V
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions H
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at I
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004LC

J
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1.
The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time.
MALFUNCTION A
K
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut.
L
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2376E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]

An excessively high voltage from the sen- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0138 A)
sor is sent to ECM.
Heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors
2 circuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0158
The minimum voltage from the sensor is ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0158 B)
not reached to the specified voltage.
(Bank 2) ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004LD

NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-957, "PROCEDURE FOR
MALFUNCTION A" . SEF174Y
With GST
With CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
A
EC
PBIB2372E D
NOTE:
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. E
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). F
Overall Function Check NBS004LE
G
H
With GST
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and J
ground.
at least 10 times. K
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure. L
essary.
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D M
position.
procedure.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0045Q
BANK 1
TBWM1330E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
6 R
E
F
[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
J

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1331E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
25 P
E
F
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
J
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0045R

L
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
PBIB1534E

4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 55 1 1
P0158 74 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 55 1 1
P0158 74 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER A
Check connectors for water.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. E

>> INSPECTION END

G
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS H
Refer to EC-818, "Ground Inspection" . I
L
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. M

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-986, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
PBIB1534E
E
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H

I
Terminals J
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 55 1 1
K
P0158 74 1 2

L
Terminals M
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 55 1 1
P0158 74 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS0045S

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

PBIB1672E
PBIB2163E
CAUTION:

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
C
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load D
at least 10 times.
procedure. E
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or F
position.
G
procedure.
CAUTION: H
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. I
Removal and Installation NBS0045T
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 J


DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description NBS004LF

tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004LG

are met.
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) 1.0V
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0045W

between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition
such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
0139 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond
P0159 2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
0159 ● Fuel injector
(Bank 2)

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0045X
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
C
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
G
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
H
K
PBIB2374E
NOTE:
L
M

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Overall Function Check NBS0045Y
WITH GST
ground.
at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
essary.
position.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec- PBIB2024E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0045Z
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1330E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
6 R
[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1331E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
G
nector.
H
I
J
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-975 or EC-986 .
K
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
PBIB1534E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 55 1 1
P0159 74 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 55 1 1
P0159 74 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC

D
>> INSPECTION END
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 E

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. F
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. H
SEF174Y
I
J
L
PBIB1672E
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. M
PBIB2163E
CAUTION:

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
ground.
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION:


[VK45DE]
A
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas D
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
E
P0171 ● Intake air leaks
(Bank 1)
● Fuel injector F
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
Fuel injection system too ● Exhaust gas leaks
lean ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
P0174 ● Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
0174 ● Lack of fuel G
(Bank 2)
H
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II. K
L
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-981, "Diagnostic
Procedure" . M
NOTE:
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.

[VK45DE]
WITH GST
nector.
detected.

NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
utes. Refer to the table below.

[VK45DE]
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1332E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5
PBIB0042E
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0043E

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1333E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB0042E
41 BR Fuel injector No. 4
42 B Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0043E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VK45DE]

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC
E
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. Check PCV hose connection. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. I

[VK45DE]
2. Disconnect corresponding air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
PBIB3246E


1 16
2 75
Bank 1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
EC
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Fuel filter for clogging F

G
With CONSULT-II
H
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling I
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST J
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
K
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG L
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or M
grounds. Refer to EC-867, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1307, "FUEL INJEC-
TOR" .
PBIB0133E

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect harness connectors F21, F201 (bank 1) and F41, F221 (bank 2).
PBIB3248E
: Vehicle front 1. Harness connectors F41, F221 2. Harness connectors F21, F201

4. Check voltage between the following;
harness connector F21 terminal 5 and ground,
harness connector F41 terminal 5 and ground
Cylinder Harness connector terminal ECM terminal PBIB0180E
1 F21 terminal 3 23
3 F21 terminal 2 22
5 F21 terminal 1 21
7 F21 terminal 6 44
2 F41 terminal 3 42
4 F41 terminal 2 41
6 F41 terminal 1 40
8 F41 terminal 6 63

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1307, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

[VK45DE]
Provide battery voltage between the following terminals, and then
interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
EC
terminal
Cylinder Harness connector
(+) (–)
1 3 C
3 2
F201 5
5 1
7 6
D
PBIB2449E
2 3
4 2 E
F221 5
6 1
8 6
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. G
10. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR H

I
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-194, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
J
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
K
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injec- L
tors on bank 1.
tors on bank 2.
M
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
P0172 ● A/F sensor 1
0172
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector
(Bank 1) Fuel injection system too
● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
0175
(Bank 2) ● Mass air flow sensor
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-992, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
NOTE:
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below.
[VK45DE]
check for fouling, etc. A
WITH GST
EC
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector. Then
C
nector.
detected. D
E
F
NOTE:
G
H
I
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), J
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). K
If engine starts, go to EC-992, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and L

[VK45DE]
BANK 1
TBWM1332E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition H
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm I
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5
PBIB0042E
23 P Fuel injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE J
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
K
L
PBIB0043E
M

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
TBWM1333E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V) F
● Idle speed
NOTE: G
at idle
41 BR Fuel injector No. 4 PBIB0042E H
42 B Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm J
PBIB0043E
K
[Engine is running]
76 R Approximately 3.1V L
● Idle speed
M

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0046A

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3246E
E

F
1 16
H
2 75
Bank 1
5 35
6 56 I
1 76
2 77
Bank 2 J
5 57
6 58
K
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L
Bank 1 Bank 2
M
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


With CONSULT-II
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1307, "FUEL INJEC-
TOR" .
PBIB0133E

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
PBIB3248E
: Vehicle front 1. Harness connectors F41, F221 2. Harness connectors F21, F201 F
harness connector F21 terminal 5 and ground, G
H
6. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I
J
1 F21 terminal 3 23
3 F21 terminal 2 22
5 F21 terminal 1 21 K
7 F21 terminal 6 44
2 F41 terminal 3 42
L
4 F41 terminal 2 41
6 F41 terminal 1 40
8 F41 terminal 6 63 M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

[VK45DE]
terminal
(+) (–)
1 3
3 2
F201 5
5 1
7 6
PBIB2449E
2 3
4 2
F221 5
6 1
8 6

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

3. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-194, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description NBS0046B
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from EC
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases. C
PBIB1507E
E
<Reference data>
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0046C
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
Fuel tank temperature
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage sig- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor circuit range/
0181 nals from engine coolant temperature sensor K
performance ● Fuel tank temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0046D
L
NOTE:
M
WITH CONSULT-II
If the result is NG, go to EC-1000, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
SEF174Y
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).

[VK45DE]
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0046E
EC
TBWM1334E

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0046F

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

nector.
PBIB1507E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E

[VK45DE]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” EC
C
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. G
amp.” I
J
Refer to EC-1002, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. L
Refer to EC-811, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0046G

terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation NBS0046H


[VK45DE]
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description NBS0046I
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from EC
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases. C
PBIB1507E
E
<Reference data>
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0046J
P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0182 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
0183 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0046K

L
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
WITH CONSULT-II
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1005, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0046L
TBWM1334E

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0046M

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. EC
PBIB2195E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
I
nector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. K
M
PBIB1507E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E

[VK45DE]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

amp.”

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0046N
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as EC
C
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
D
PBIB0931E
E
Removal and Installation NBS0046O


[VK45DE]
Component Description NBS0046P

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0046Q


(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VK45DE]
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0046T
TBWM1335E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped D
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor) G
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped H
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON] I
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed J
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
K
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0046U

L
M
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
tor.
PBIB3232E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3250E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VK45DE]
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 and ECM terminal 66. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0046V
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.

69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

step.
Removal and Installation NBS0046W

Refer to EM-179, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

FIRE
[VK45DE]
FIRE PFP:00000 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0046X
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire C
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) D
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change. E
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only G
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
H
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire
Multiple cylinder misfire. I
0300 detected
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire ● Improper spark plug
0301 detected
● Insufficient compression
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire J
No. 2 cylinder misfires. ● Incorrect fuel pressure
0302 detected
● The fuel injector circuit is open or
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire shorted
0303 detected K
● Fuel injector
No. 4 cylinder misfires. ● Intake air leak
0304 detected
● The ignition signal circuit is open or
P0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire L
No. 5 cylinder misfires. shorted
0305 detected
● Lack of fuel
No. 6 cylinder misfires. ● Drive plate
0306 detected M
● A/F sensor 1
No. 7 cylinder misfires. ● Incorrect PCV hose connection
0307 detected
0308 detected

FIRE
[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0046Y
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
dure" .
NOTE:
ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E

The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST

FIRE
[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0046Z
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK A
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.

2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. EC
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
C
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING D
1. Stop engine
2. Turn ignition switch OFF E
3. Visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (manifold) and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. F
NG >> Repair or replace it.
G
With CONSULT-II
H
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
I
K
PBIB0133E
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4. L
No >> GO TO 10.

FIRE
[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
PBIB3248E

1 F21 terminal 3 23
3 F21 terminal 2 22
5 F21 terminal 1 21
7 F21 terminal 6 44
2 F41 terminal 3 42
4 F41 terminal 2 41
6 F41 terminal 1 40
8 F41 terminal 6 63

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

FIRE
[VK45DE]
EC
terminal
(+) (–)
1 3 C
3 2
F201 5
5 1
7 6
D
PBIB2449E
2 3
4 2 E
F221 5
6 1
8 6
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G

FIRE
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Start engine.
pressure.

checked.
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.

3. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded metal portion.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1328 .

FIRE
[VK45DE]
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG A
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For EC
spark plug type, refer to EM-192 .
2. GO TO 9. C
D
SEF156I
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III E

F
and the grounded portion.
OK or NG G
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-192 .
H
10. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-232, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" ,.
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. J
1. Install all removed parts. K
L
At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. M
NG >> GO TO 12.


FIRE
[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Follow the Basic Inspection.

FIRE
[VK45DE]
EC
PBIB3246E
E

F
1 16
H
2 75
Bank 1
5 35
6 56 I
1 76
2 77
Bank 2 J
5 57
6 58
K
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L
Bank 1 Bank 2
M
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

FIRE
[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning A/F sensor 1.

With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
17. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-757, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
18. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-727, "HOW TO ERASE
>> GO TO 19.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VK45DE]
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS PFP:22060
A
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from EC
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
C
PBIB0021E
E
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
P0327
0327
(bank 1) Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor G
P0332 input is sent to ECM.
0332
(bank 2)
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) H
P0328
● Knock sensor
0328
(bank 1) Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor
input is sent to ECM. I
P0333
0333
(bank 2)
J
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K
TESTING CONDITION:
L
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. M
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VK45DE]
TBWM0241E

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
15 W Knock sensor (bank 1) [Engine is running] C

Approximately 2.5V
36 W Knock sensor (bank 2) ● Idle speed

D
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
E
3. Check resistance between ECM terminals 15, 36 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE: F
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
H
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
I
ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor (bank1) terminal 1, J
ECM terminal 36 and knock sensor (bank 2) terminal 1.
Continuity should exist. K
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0021E
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VK45DE]
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VK45DE]
KNOCK SENSOR A
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more EC
than 10 MΩ.
C
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
D
SEF111Y

E
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-248, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
F

[VK45DE]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assem-

bly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluc-
tuation of the engine revolution.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
PBIB0562E
the engine revolution.
PBIB2448E

● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0335 Crankshaft position
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
0335 sensor (POS) circuit ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
while the engine is running.
● Signal plate
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0047A
A
NOTE:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II C
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec- D
onds at idle speed.
dure" . E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0047B
TBWM1336E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
13 Y
(POS)
1.0 - 2.0V
F
[Engine is running]
PBIB1042E
H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF I
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF J
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
K

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. M
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
PBIB1483E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF481Y

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground

[VK45DE]
6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D

Refer to EC-1036, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). F
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

G
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. H
NG >> Replace the signal plate.

>> INSPECTION END J

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0047D
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
PBIB0563E

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation NBS0047E
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to AT-270, "REMOVAL" .

DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)
[VK45DE]
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
A
Component Description NBS0047F
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of

exhaust camshaft sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The cam- EC
shaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification C
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause D
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIB0562E
change.
E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
PBIB2448E
I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS005S7

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0047G
L
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
M
P0340 Camshaft position sen- ● Camshaft sprocket (Exhaust)
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
0340 sor (PHASE) circuit
during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-8 .)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-8 .)
pattern during engine running.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0047H
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
onds at idle speed.
dure" .
5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
dure" . SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0047I
EC
TBWM1337E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB1039E
14 W
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0047J
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer toSC-8, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

[VK45DE]
E
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
H
PBIB1499E
K
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. M
SEF481Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (EXHAUST)

Visually check camshaft sprocket (exhaust) for chipping.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace camshaft sprocket (exhaust).

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0047K
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) A

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
PBIB0563E
F
3(+) - 1 (-) G
2 (+) - 1 (-) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (-)
H
I
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation NBS0047L
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) J

Refer to EM-215, "CAMSHAFT" .

[VK45DE]
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004LH
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of A/F sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor
2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (mani-
fold) malfunction is diagnosed.
PBIB2055E
P0420 ● Three way catalyst (manifold)
0420 ● Exhaust tube
(Bank 1) ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not oper- ● Intake air leaks
Catalyst system effi- ate properly.
● Fuel injector
P0430 ciency below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
0430
(Bank 2) ● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004LI
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF189Y

[VK45DE]
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II. A
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. EC
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB1784E
D
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes). E
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
F
G
PBIB1785E
12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. H

13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1046, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" . I
SEF535Z K
Overall Function Check NBS004LJ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st L
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals ECM terminals 55
[HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 74 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and
ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-1046, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB2056E

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0047P
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (Manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

Ignition timing 12° ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK FUEL INJECTORS A
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42,
44, 63 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injectors, EC-1308 .
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-1309, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
PBIB1527E
E
CAUTION:
F
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. G
NOTE:
H
3. Start engine.
pressure.
I
J
checked.
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. K
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion L
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
M
portion.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.

[VK45DE]
and the grounded metal portion.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1328 .
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG

OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-192 .
2. GO TO 9.
SEF156I

and the grounded portion.
OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-192 .

2. Remove fuel tube assembly.
3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.

[VK45DE]
A
System Description NBS0047Q
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform EC
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
H
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con- I
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
J
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
K

solenoid valve stuck closed
L
and the circuit
● Loose, disconnected or improper con-
EVAP control system does not operate prop- nection of rubber tube M
P0441 EVAP control system erly, EVAP control system has a leak between ● Blocked rubber tube
0441 incorrect purge flow intake manifold and EVAP control system pres-
● Cracked EVAP canister
sure sensor.
solenoid valve circuit
● Blocked purge port
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
[VK45DE]
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
PBIB0826E
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.

Overall Function Check NBS0047T
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
PBIB1109E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position Any position other than P, N or R
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.

[VK45DE]
A
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0047U

EC
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
C
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
D
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II E
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-700, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . F
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. G
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. H
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum
100% Should exist.
I
0% Should not exist.
OK or NG PBIB1678E
OK >> GO TO 7. J
NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW K

Without CONSULT-II
L
2. Stop engine.
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-700, "EVAPORA-
M
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.
6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.

OK or NG
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

[VK45DE]
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. C
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION D

Refer to DTC P0452 EC-1095, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , P0453 EC-1101, "DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure" .
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 10.
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. H
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. J
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE K

Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.
M
>> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0047V
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
P0442
small leak detected control system does not operate prop-
0442 ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
(negative pressure) erly.
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0047W
NOTE: C
TESTING CONDITION:
D
● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). E
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met. G
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
H
I
PBIB2869E
J
with CONSULT-II.
K
PBIB0829E
NOTE:

[VK45DE]
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C

[VK45DE]
WITH GST
NOTE: A
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-724, "Driving Pattern" . EC
3. Stop vehicle.
C
● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-1051, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D

Diagnostic Procedure NBS0047X
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
G
SEF915U
I
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. K
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. M
NG >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VK45DE]
sure pump to EVAP service port (2) securely.
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (1)
NOTE:
PBIB3238E
SEF916U

With CONSULT-II
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
PEF917U
Refer to EC-700, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
PBIB1522E
F
CAUTION:
●
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
SEF200U
K
● EVAP canister vent control valve. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

[VK45DE]
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
PBIB1031E

attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Stop engine.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
E
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-768, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. G

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. K
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.

Refer to EC-709, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
PFP:14920 A
Description NBS004DE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
Battery Battery voltage*1 D
E
A/F sensor 1
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
F
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the H
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis- J
SEF337U
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004DF

PURG VOL C/V
● No load

[VK45DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004DG
solenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the (The valve is stuck open.)
EVAP canister purge
P0443 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
volume control solenoid ● EVAP canister vent control valve
0443 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
valve ● EVAP canister
completely closed.
● Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004DH
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
PBIB0839E
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004DI
EC
TBWM1338E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol- PBIB0050E

45 W
11 - 14V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0051E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004DJ
CUIT
(1) harness connector.
– EVAP service port (2) C
E
PBIB3238E

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
PBIB0148E
I

J
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM L
M
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG

With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[VK45DE]
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 13. C
PBIB1031E E

F
attached.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
H
I
J
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K

L
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004DK

With CONSULT-II
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between A and B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation NBS004DL


VALVE
[VK45DE]
VALVE PFP:14920 A
Description NBS0047Y
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
C
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position E
A/F sensor 1
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank F
Wheel sensor 2
Vehicle speed*
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP H
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
J
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
SEF337U
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0047Z

PURG VOL C/V
● No load

VALVE
[VK45DE]
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent shorted.)
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent
0445 to ECM through the valve ● EVAP canister purge volume control
shorted
solenoid valve
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

VALVE
[VK45DE]
EC
TBWM1338E

VALVE
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol- PBIB0050E

45 W
11 - 14V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0051E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

VALVE
[VK45DE]
CUIT
(1) harness connector.
– EVAP service port (2) C
E
PBIB3238E

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
PBIB0148E
I

J
L
OK or NG

VALVE
[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-II
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between A and B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB0150E

VALVE
[VK45DE]
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

EC

[VK45DE]
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
opened.
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System” diagnosis.
PBIB1522E

P0447 EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
0447 trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.

[VK45DE]
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
dure" .
E
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0048A
TBWM1339E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE C
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0048B

D
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No E
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
F
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. H
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3. J
PBIB1679E

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
PBIB1522E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0152E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VK45DE]
● Harness connectors M11, B1 EC
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
C

D
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 8.
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
H
Refer to EC-811, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I
>> INSPECTION END

J
Component Inspection NBS0048C

With CONSULT-II
K
rusted.
L
M
PBIB1033E

[VK45DE]
ON No
OFF Yes

Without CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes


[VK45DE]
A
Component Description NBS004DM
ter and is used to seal the canister vent. EC
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative C
opened. D
PBIB1263E
E
H
PBIB1522E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004DN

I
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004DO
K
● EVAP control system pressure sensor L
P0448 EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
0448 trol valve close closed under specified driving conditions. ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
M

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004DP
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1088, "Diagnostic Proce- SEF058Y
dure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
PBIB0972E

WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004DQ
EC
TBWM1339E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004DR

PBIB1522E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.

Refer to EC-1089, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1031E

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER A
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. C

Check the following. D
E
6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR F

2. Check connectors for water. G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 7.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 8.
K
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004DS
M
With CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E

[VK45DE]
Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly.
ON No
OFF Yes

Without CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E
Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly.
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes


[VK45DE]
A
Component Description NBS0048D
ECM increases as pressure increases. EC
E
PBIB1522E
PBIB1207E I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0048E
Specification data are reference values. J

K
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0048F
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to L
EC-1149, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
M
P0451 ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
pressure sensor perfor-
0451 control system pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
mance

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0048G
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1092, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
SEF194Y
WITH GST

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER A
EC
PBIB1522E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water. E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
I
Refer to EC-811, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-1096 .
>> INSPECTION END K

Component Inspection NBS0048I

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. L
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM M
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
CAUTION:

[VK45DE]
Component Description NBS0048J
PBIB1522E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0048K

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0048L
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to

P0452 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
pressure sensor low
0452 sent to ECM.
input ● EVAP control system pressure sensor

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0048M
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
dure" .
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST H
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. I
5. Select “Service $07” with GST. J
dure" .
K
PBIB1110E

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0048N
TBWM1340E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sure sensor
Sensor power supply
D
sure sensor)
[Engine is running]
E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0048O
F
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. G
PBIB2195E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
L
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
M
PBIB1522E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

SHORT
67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VK45DE]
SHORT
2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

E

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. I

>> INSPECTION END K
Component Inspection NBS0048P
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. M
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
CAUTION:

[VK45DE]
Component Description NBS0048Q
PBIB1522E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0048R

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0048S
NOTE:
EVAP control system ● EVAP control system pressure sensor

pressure sensor high ● EVAP canister vent control valve
0453 sent to ECM.
input ● EVAP canister
● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0048T
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
dure" .
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. H
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1103, "Diagnostic Proce- J
dure" .
K
PBIB1110E

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS0048U
TBWM1340E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sure sensor
Sensor power supply
D
sure sensor)
[Engine is running]
E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0048V
F
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. G
PBIB2195E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
L
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
M
PBIB1522E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

SHORT
67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VK45DE]
SHORT
2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

E

H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 11.
L
Refer to EC-1107, "Component Inspection" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[VK45DE]
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1031E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.


>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS0048W
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A

2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC
C
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
D
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. E
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. F

[VK45DE]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0048X
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
EVAP control system has a very large leak ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system leaks
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control sys-
0455 gross leak detected
tem does not operate properly. ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
solenoid valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,

[VK45DE]
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
A
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0048Y
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. EC
NOTE:
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
C
TESTING CONDITION:
D
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures. E
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
CONSULT-II. G
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) H
PBIB2869E
J
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed. K
PBIB0829E
NOTE:

[VK45DE]
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-1110, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442 EC-1057, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC763C
WITH GST
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
3. Stop vehicle.
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0048Z

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE C

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-700, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. E

F
>> GO TO 7. G
● EVAP canister vent control valve. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J

[VK45DE]
NOTE:
PBIB3238E
SEF916U

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
SEF200U

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
PBIB1522E
F
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 12.
J
K
SEF200U
L
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine. M
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1678E

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

[VK45DE]
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. EC
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE C

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
E
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. G
20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE H

Refer to EC-709, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. I

K
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB1026E
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Evaporative emission ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
0456 small leak (negative ● EVAP system does not operate prop- ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
pressure check) erly. ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
NOTE: C
● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait D
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. E
● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour.
– Fuel filler cap is removed. F
– Fuel is refilled or drained.
– EVAP component parts is/are removed.
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. G
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with H
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) I
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool J
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output
voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then PBIB2870E
K
start from step 1).
4. Turn ignition switch ON. L
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
M
PBIB0837E

NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-737, "Basic Inspection" .

[VK45DE]
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Overall Function Check NBS00492
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
● Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
vice port (2).
PBIB3238E
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.

3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
5. Connect GST and select “Service $08”.
6. Using “Service $08” control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP SEF462UI
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
8. Disconnect GST.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.

[VK45DE]
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN A

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. C
SEF915U
E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. L

[VK45DE]
NOTE:
PBIB3238E
SEF916U

With CONSULT-II
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
PBIB1522E
F
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
K
SEF200U

L
Refer to EC-703, "Removal and Installation" . M
● EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

[VK45DE]
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
PBIB1031E

attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Stop engine.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
E
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-768, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. G

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. K
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
A
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to EC
nication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari- C
D
PBIB1508E
E
NOTE:
● If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC F
G
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
H
(The CAN communication line is open or I
shorted)
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit ● Harness or connectors
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
0460 noise
to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
J

K
NOTE:
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. M
3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
dure" .
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer toFL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY"

[VK45DE]
A
nication line.
D
PBIB1508E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0049A
NOTE:
● If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC F
G
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
H
(The CAN communication line is open or I
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even ● Harness or connectors
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis-
tance. J
Overall Function Check NBS0049B

K
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
L
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-10,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION: M
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-746, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.

[VK45DE]
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-
II.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-
5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. SEF195Y
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-746, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation NBS0049D
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


[VK45DE]
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
A
Component Description NBS0049E
nication line.
D
PBIB1508E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0049F
NOTE:
● If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis F
for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-819, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
G
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
H
0462 low input sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
● Harness or connectors I
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
0463 high input sent to ECM. ● Unified meter and A/C amp.
● Fuel level sensor J
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0049G

K
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation NBS0049I
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


DTC P0500 VSS
[VK45DE]
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
A
NOTE:
● If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” from the “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” by CAN communication line. The “unified meter and A/C amp.” then sends a signal to the ECM
by CAN communication line.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0049K
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
F
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Harness or connectors
P0500 (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
0500 shorted)
even when vehicle is being driven.
● Wheel sensor G
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0049L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. I
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
TESTING CONDITION:
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT- L
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If OK, go to following step. M
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
onds.
Selector lever Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
dure" . SEF196Y

DTC P0500 VSS
[VK45DE]
Overall Function Check NBS0049M
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0049N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
A
Description NBS0049O
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. EC
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. C
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0049P E
Idle speed control sys- ● Electric throttle control actuator F
P0506 The idle speed is less than the target idle
tem RPM lower than
0506 speed by 100 rpm or more. ● Intake air leak
expected
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0049Q

G
NOTE:
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-744, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Open engine hood. K
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” L
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1134, "Diagnostic Proce- M
dure" .
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0049R

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
A
Description NBS0049S
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. EC
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. C
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0049T E
Idle speed control sys- ● Electric throttle control actuator F

P0507 The idle speed is more than the target idle
tem RPM higher than ● Intake air leak
0507 speed by 200 rpm or more.
expected ● PCV system
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0049U
NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait H
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-744, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-1362, I
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Open engine hood. K
L
M
dure" .
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS0049V
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION

Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
A
Component Description NBS0049W
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This EC
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and C
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
PBIB1484E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS0049X

PW/ST SIGNAL
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS0049Y

NOTE: H
I
P0550 Power steering pres- An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0550 sure sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM. J
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS0049Z

K
NOTE:
L
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004A0
TBWM0249E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel: Being turned
12 R/G
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel: Not being turned D
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
E
Sensor power supply

68 SB (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor) F
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004A1
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. H
PBIB2195E
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
M

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
PBIB1484E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0188E

● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and ECM
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors.

[VK45DE]
6. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
● Harness connectors E306, F46 E
F
8. CHECK PSP SENSOR

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. H
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.

J
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS004A2
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR K

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the L
Condition Voltage M
Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E
Removal and Installation NBS004A3

Refer to PS-39, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .

[VK45DE]
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
Component Description NBS004A8
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004A9
P0603 ECM power supply cir- ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
0603 cuit properly. open or shorted.]
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004AA
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for four times.
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004AB
EC
TBWM1341E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004AC
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0026E

● 20A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
With GST D
3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. E
Yes or No F
Yes >> GO TO 5.
G
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
H
I
6. Perform EC-744, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
>> INSPECTION END

K

DTC P0605 ECM
[VK45DE]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
Component Description NBS004A4
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004A5
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring.
● ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004A6
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
With GST

DTC P0605 ECM
[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II A
EC
ON.
dure" . C
SEF058Y
E
With GST
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C F
With CONSULT-II
G
ON.
H
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
dure" .
I
J
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. K
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004A7
1. INSPECTION START L
With CONSULT-II
M
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0605 ECM
[VK45DE]
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:18919
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004DA

EC
Trouble diagnosis
name
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) C
(EVAP control system pressure sensor is
shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is D
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for shorted.)
0643 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high. (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
E
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. G
spring. H
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004DB
NOTE: I
TESTING CONDITION: J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. K
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1152, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004DC
TBWM1350E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
D
sor)
Sensor power supply
68 SB (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V E
sensor)
(APP sensor 1 / ICC steer- F
ing switch / ASCD steering
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground G
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
90 L/B
Sensor power supply
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
H
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
I
98 Y/R
L
106 OR
M

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004DD

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

connector.
PBIB1548E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS A
EC
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1096
49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-1342 C
68 PSP sensor terminal 1 EC-1138
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK COMPONENTS E

● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-1099, "Component Inspection" .) F
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-89, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .)
● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-1141, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
H
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. J
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. K
4. Perform EC-744, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . L
>> INSPECTION END

M
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH PFP:23006
Component Description NBS004EW
When the selector lever position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004EX

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004EY
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) circuit is open or shorted.]
P0850 Park/neutral position
switch is not changed in the process of engine ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
0850 switch
starting and driving.
● TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004EZ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
N or P position ON
Except above position OFF

SEF212Y

onds.
Selector lever Suitable position SEF213Y

[VK45DE]
Overall Function Check NBS004F0
A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST EC
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions. C
Position (Selector lever) Voltage (Known-good data)
P or N position Approx. 0V
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except above position
(11 - 14V)
3. If NG, go to EC-1157, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E
MBIB0043E

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004F1
TBWM0521E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON] C
Approximately 0V
102 LG/B PNP switch
● Selector lever: Except above (11 - 14V) D
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004F2
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM E
Refer to AT-40, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM G
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.

Does starter motor operate? H
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to SC-8, "STARTING SYSTEM" . I
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
K
4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 32.
Continuity should exist. L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and “unified meter and A/C amp.”

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 25.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III
1. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8.
Refer to AT-107, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. REPLACE “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.”

Refer to DI-28, "UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
[VK45DE]
DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR PFP:23731
A
Component Description NBS004B9
Intake valve timing control position sensors are located in the front of
cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. EC
This sensor uses a Hall IC.
The cam position is determined by the intake camshaft sprocket con-
cave (in four places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve
timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing accord- C
ing to drive conditions based on detected cam position.
SEF359Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004BA

G
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004BB H
P1140 ● Harness or connectors I
1140 (Intake valve timing control position
(Bank 1) sensor circuit is open or shorted)
● Intake valve timing control position
J
Intake valve timing control An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor
P1145 position sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM. ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
1145 ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 2) K
● Accumulation of debris to the signal
pick-up portion of the camshaft
sprocket
L
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004BC
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at M
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 seconds.
ENG SPEED More than idle speed
Selector lever P or N position
dure" .
SEF058Y

[VK45DE]
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004BD
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1347E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
72 BR
[Engine is running]
PBIB2046E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1348E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
53 R/L
[Engine is running]
PBIB2046E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004BE

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
PBIB1517E

3. Check voltage between intake valve timing control position sen-
sor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
SEF509Y

● Harness connectors E211, M41 J
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ECM K
L
4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
M
2. Check harness continuity between intake valve timing control position sensor terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

[VK45DE]
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ground
6. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
ECM terminal 72 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 1) terminal 2 or
ECM terminal 53 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 2) terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control position sensor.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

Check accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft sprocket. Refer to EM-203, "TIM-
ING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal pick-up cutout of camshaft sprocket.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004BF
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR A

SEF362Z
5. Check resistance as shown below. F

3 (+) - 1 (-) G
2 (+) - 1 (-) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (-)
H
6. If NG, replace intake valve timing control position sensor.
PBIB0194E
I
Removal and Installation NBS004BG
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR J


DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
[VK45DE]
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL PFP:22690
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004LK

P1148 The closed loop control function for bank 1 ● Harness or connectors
1148 does not operate even when vehicle is driving (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
(Bank 1) Closed loop control in the specified condition.
shorted.)
P1168 function The closed loop control function for bank 2 ● A/F sensor 1
1168 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
(Bank 2) in the specified condition. ● A/F sensor 1 heater
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for A/F sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
[VK45DE]
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850
A
Description NBS004CK
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM. EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004CL C
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
D
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from unit)
TCS control unit E
1211 “ABS actuator electric unit (control unit)”
● TCS related parts
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004CM

F
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II G
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. H
dure" .
I
SEF058Y
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004CN

M

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
[VK45DE]
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:47850
Description NBS004CO
NOTE:
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004CP
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
ECM can not receive the information (The CAN communication line is open or
P1212 TCS communication shorted.)
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
1212 line
trol unit)” continuously. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004CQ
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004CR

[VK45DE]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
A
Description NBS004CS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE: EC
Cooling Fan Control

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D
Battery Battery voltage*1 E
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R

control (Cooling fan relay)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature F
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
G
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant H
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
I
PBIB2560E

[VK45DE]
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1 3
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF
Middle (MID) OFF ON
High (HI) ON ON
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan motor terminals
Cooling fan speed
(+) (-)
1 3 and 4
Middle
2 3 and 4
High 1 and 2 3 and 4
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004CT

OFF
(201°F) or less
the engine Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN MID
95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F)
HI
(221°F) or more
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004CU
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
heat). ● IPDM E/R
● Cooling fan system does not operate prop- ● Cooling fan
P1217 Engine over tempera- erly (Overheat). ● Radiator hose

1217 ture (Overheat) ● Engine coolant was not added to the system ● Radiator
using the proper filling method. ● Radiator cap
● Engine coolant is not within the specified ● Water pump
range.
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-1181,
"Main 13 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-38, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-27, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, "Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" .

[VK45DE]
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
A
Overall Function Check NBS004CV
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed. EC
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up C
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II D
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1177, E
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1177, F
G
SEF621W
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- H

SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-1177, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
SEF646X K
WITH GST
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. L
"Diagnostic Procedure" . M
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1177,
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
SEF621W

[VK45DE]
4. Connect 200Ω resister to the engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
5. Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at middle
speed.
7. Disconnect 200Ω resister from engine coolant temperature sen-
sor harness connector.
PBIB0965E
8. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
9. Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher
speed than middle speed.
SEF882V

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004CW
EC
TBWM1349E

[VK45DE]
TBWM0255E

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004CX
1. CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN) A
1. Start engine and let id idle.

2. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally. EC
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. C
NG >> Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to CO-49, "COOLING FAN" .
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MIDDLE SPEED OPERATION D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle. E
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II, and touch “MID” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan middle speed control circuit. (Go to G
EC-1179, "PROCEDURE A" .)
H
PBIB1668E
3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION I
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- J
SULT-II and touch “HI” on the CONSULT-II screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than middle
speed. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC- L
1181, "PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF785Z M

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MIDDLE SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
2. Connect 200Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan middle speed control circuit. (Go to
EC-1179, "PROCEDURE A" .)
PBIB0965E
5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect 200Ω resister to the engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
2. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than middle
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1181,
"PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF882V
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-38, "LEAK
CHECK" . PBIC1528E
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump

[VK45DE]
7. CHECK RADIATOR CAP A
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
relief pressure: EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. C
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
D
SLC755A
8. CHECK COMPONENT PARTS E

● Thermostat. (Refer to CO-53, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .)
F
● Water control valve. (Refer to CO-53, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .)
● Engine coolant temperature sensor. (Refer to EC-884, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 9.
H
9. CHECK MAIN 13 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-1181, "Main 13 Causes of Overheating" .
I
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE A J
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0966E

● 40A fusible link
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 2
and IPDM E/R terminal 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1493E
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

cooling fan motor terminal 3 and ground,
cooling fan motor terminal 4 and ground,
IPDM E/R terminal 38 and ground,
IPDM E/R terminal 60 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors.

[VK45DE]
PROCEDURE B
A
1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. EC
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1
and IPDM E/R terminal 11.
Refer to wiring diagram. C

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power E
PBIB1493E
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

OK or NG I
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors.
J
Main 13 Causes of Overheating NBS004CY

K
OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille L
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-13
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level CO-38 M
in reservoir tank and radi-
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-43
2
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm , 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-38
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-53
lower radiator hoses
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-1171 ).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer

[VK45DE]
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving CO-38
reservoir tank and idling
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in CO-38

reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank
tor
OFF 11 ● Water control valve ● Remove and inspect Within the specified value CO-53
the valve
OFF 12 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-232
gauge mum distortion (warping)
13 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-248
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-34, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection NBS004CZ
COOLING FAN MOTOR

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
Middle
Cooling fan motor 2 3 and 4
High 1, 2 3, 4
SEF321T
Cooling fan motor should operate.

If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
A
Component Description NBS004D0

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004D1

F
Closed throttle position
P1225 Closed throttle position learning value is exces- ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance G
1225 sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004D2
H
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
K
dure" . L
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004D3

3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3247E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation NBS004D4


DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
A
Component Description NBS004D5

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004D6

F
Closed throttle position
P1226 Closed throttle position learning is not per- ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance G
1226 formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004D7
H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
K
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1186, "Diagnostic Proce- L
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004D8

and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3247E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation NBS004D9


[VK45DE]
DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
A
Component Description NBS004DT
ICC steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of
switch, and determines which button is operated. EC
E
PBIB3241E
1. ICC steering switch 2. MAIN switch 3. DISTANCE switch

4. CANCEL switch 5. SET/COAST switch 6. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004DU G
H
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON I
ON J
Pressed
OFF
Released
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON K
DISTANCE switch: Pressed ON
DIST SW ● Ignition switch: ON L
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004DV

M
NOTE:
EC-1146 .
Trouble diagnosis
name
● An excessively high voltage signal from the
ICC steering switch is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
P1564 ● ECM detects that input signal from the ICC (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ICC steering switch
1564 steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ICC steering switch
● ECM detects that the ICC steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004DW
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release
it and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF058Y
8. Press DISTANCE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it

WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004DX
EC
TBWM0724E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Approximately 4.3V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 1.3V
99 G/Y ICC steering switch
Approximately 3.7V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2.2V
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004DY

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET
SW” and “DIST SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. C

Pressed ON D
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW E
Released OFF MBIB0064E
RESUME/ACCEL- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ERATE switch Released OFF F
Pressed ON
Released OFF
Pressed ON G
DISTANCE switch DIST SW
Released OFF
H
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press- I
ing each button.
J
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Pressed Approx. 1.3 K
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELER- Pressed Approx. 3.7

ATE switch Released Approx. 4.3 PBIB0311E L
Pressed Approx. 3.0
SET/COAST switch
M
Pressed Approx. 2.2
DISTANCE switch
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M203.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 82.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

5. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

7. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace ICC steering switch.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004DZ
ICC STEERING SWITCH A

2. Check continuity between combination switch terminals 14 and
15 with pushing each switch. EC

Pressed Approx. 0 C
MAIN switch
Pressed Approx. 310
CANCEL switch D

E
Pressed Approx. 1,400
SET/COAST switch
Pressed Approx. 740 F
DISTANCE switch
If NG, replace ICC steering switch. G

[VK45DE]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
Component Description NBS004E0
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
PBIB3241E
1. ASCD steering switch 2. MAIN switch 3. DISTANCE switch

(ICC models only)
4. CANCEL switch 5. SET/COAST switch 6. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004E1

ON
Pressed
OFF
Released
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004E2

NOTE:
EC-1146 .
Trouble diagnosis
name
● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
P1564 ASCD steering ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
1564 switch steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ASCD steering switch
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004E3
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. D
6. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. E
WITH GST
F

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004E4
TBWM0725E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V E
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V
F
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004E5

H
I
PBIB2195E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
Released OFF
RESUME/ACCEL- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ERATE switch Released OFF
SEC006D
Pressed ON
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press-
ing each button.
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 1
CANCEL switch
Released Approx. 4
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 3

switch Released Approx. 4 PBIB0311E
Pressed Approx. 2
SET/COAST switch
Released Approx. 4
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector M203.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 82. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch EC
C
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14. D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. F
NG >> GO TO 6.

G
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch H
I
7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-1200, "Component Inspection" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. K
>> INSPECTION END

M

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004E6

2. Check continuity between combination switch terminals 14 and
15 with pushing each switch.
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch

Pressed Approx. 660

SET/COAST switch
If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.

DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION
[VK45DE]
DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION PFP:18995
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004E7

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. EC
NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-819, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . C
● If DTC P1568 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. D
Trouble Diagnosis
Name E
P1568 ECM detects a difference between signals shorted.)
ICC function F
1568 from ICC unit is out of specified range.
● ICC unit
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004E8

G
CAUTION:
H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II J
K
3. Press MAIN switch on ICC steering switch.
5. Press SET/COAST switch. L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004E9
1. REPLACE ICC UNIT

1. Replace ICC unit.
2. Perform ACS-11, "ACTION TEST" .
3. Check DTC of ICC unit. Refer to ACS-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" .
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description NBS004EA
and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the
brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
PBIB2558E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004EB


(ICC brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004EC
This diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

NOTE:
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
Trouble diagnosis
name
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h ● Harness or connectors
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ICC brake switch are sent ● Harness or connectors
to ECM at the same time.
(The ICC brake switch circuit is shorted.)
P1572
ICC brake switch ● ICC brake switch
1572
ICC brake switch signal is not sent to ECM
● ICC brake hold relay
B) for extremely long time while the vehicle is
driving ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
● Incorrect ICC brake switch installation
● ECM

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004ED
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be C
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). E
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE lamp lights up.
F
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) G
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1205, "Diagnostic Proce- H

dure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step. PBIB2386E
5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. I

Selector lever Suitable position J
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004EE
TBWM1351E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Approximately 0V
108 SB ICC brake switch E
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004EF F

With CONSULT-II G
SULT-II. H
CONDITION INDICATION I
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
When brake pedal: Fully released ON
J
SEC011D
K
Without CONSULT-II
L
CONDITION VOLTAGE M
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E

[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
When brake pedal: Fully released OFF
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
lowing conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
PBIB1537E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 12.

Refer to ACS-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT A
PBIB1531E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. G
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB1538E
5. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

2. Disconnect ICC brake switch harness connector. J
PBIB2558E M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0857E

[VK45DE]
● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake switch.
3. Check harness continuity between ICC brake hold relay terminal 4 and ECM terminal 108.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.


OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake hold relay.

[VK45DE]
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
PBIB2558E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. G
NG >> GO TO 13.
H
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
K
14. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.


[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004EG
ICC BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check continuity between ICC brake switch terminals 1 and 2
4. If NG, adjust ICC brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

PBIB1536E
STOP LAMP SWITCH

4. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
PBIB1535E


No current supply

MBIB0063E

[VK45DE]
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Component Description NBS004EH

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of EC
Refer to EC-696, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
C
PBIB2558E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004EI

G
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004EJ

H

I
NOTE:
J
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. K
Trouble diagnosis
name
L
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h ● Harness or connectors
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ASCD brake switch are ● Harness or connectors
sent to the ECM at the same time. M
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
P1572 ASCD brake ● Stop lamp switch
1572 switch
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ● ASCD brake switch
B) ECM for extremely long time while the ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
vehicle is driving.
● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
● ECM

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004EK
CAUTION:
NOTE:
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE lamp lights up.

dure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step. PBIB2386E
5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004EL
EC
TBWM1352E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
108 SB ASCD brake switch
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004EM

With CONSULT-II
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
When brake pedal: Fully released ON
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
When brake pedal: Fully released OFF
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON C
SEC013D E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V
G
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
I
PBIB1537E
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 8.
K

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB2558E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VK45DE]
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. EC
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C

D
PBIB2558E
G

with CONSULT-II or tester. H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1184E
K
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E201 L
● 10A fuse
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

[VK45DE]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004EN
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
4. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

PBIB1536E
STOP LAMP SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
PBIB1535E

[VK45DE]
DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
A
Component Description NBS004EO
A/C amp.”, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ICC EC
control. Refer to ACS-6, "DESCRIPTION" for ICC functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004EP
C
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC D
Refer to EC-822, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . E
Refer to EC-1131, "DTC P0500 VSS" .
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. F
Refer to EC-1146, "DTC P0605 ECM".
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
name
shorted.) H
P1574 ICC vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Wheel sensor I
● TCM
● ECM
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004EQ
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. M
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).
PBIB2673E
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004ER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

Check combination meter function.
>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
A
Component Description NBS004ES
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from “unified
meter and A/C amp.”, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals EC
for ASCD control. Refer to EC-696, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004ET
C
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC D
Refer to EC-822, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . E
Refer to EC-1131, "DTC P0500 VSS"
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. F
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
name
shorted.) H
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Wheel sensor I
● TCM
● ECM
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004EU
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. M
WITH CONSULT-II
PBIB2673E
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004EV

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-40 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[VK45DE]
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:31935
A
Description NBS004LL
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this
signal for engine control. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004LM

C
the tachometer indication D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004LN
NOTE: E
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1010 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-822, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . F
G
Refer to EC-1037, "DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)" . H
The MIL will not lights up for this diagnosis.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
Input speed sensor Turbine revolution sensor signal is differ- shorted) J
P1715 (Turbine revolution sen- ent from the theoretical value calculated
1715 sor) by ECM from revolution sensor signal
(Turbine revolution sensor circuit is open or
(TCM output) and engine rpm signal.
shorted)
K
● TCM
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004LO
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM L
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-40, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to AT-44, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VK45DE]
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14955
Component Description NBS004FC
The VIAS control solenoid valve (1) cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve actuator. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
● Vacuum tank (2)
PBIB3236E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004FD

ON
VIAS S/V
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004FE

P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve cir- An excessively low or high voltage signal (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
1800 cuit is sent to ECM through the valve shorted.)
● VIAS control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004FF
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004FG
EC
TBWM1358E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004FH
1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve (1) harness connector.
– Vacuum tank (2)
PBIB3236E
4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0173E

● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair harness or connectors.

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G

H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS004FI
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE I

With CONSULT-II
J
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the K
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
VIAS SOL VALVE between A and B between A and C L
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
M
PBIB0177E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B between A and C
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
No supply No Yes

MEC488B

[VK45DE]
Removal and Installation NBS004FJ
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE


[VK45DE]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Description NBS004FK
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004FL

C
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004FM
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. E
● Harness or connectors F
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
Brake switch shorted.)
1805 extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
H
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor. I
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration J
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004FN
WITH CONSULT-II K
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. L
dure" . M
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004FO
TBWM1353E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004FP
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. F
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
G
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

L
PBIB2558E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1184E

[VK45DE]
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004FQ
STOP LAMP SWITCH A

3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 EC
Conditions Continuity
C
D
E
PBIB1185E
4. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
F

[VK45DE]
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
Component Description NBS004AW
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004AX

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004AY

P2100 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2100 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2103 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up.
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004AZ
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST

[VK45DE]
TESTING CONDITION: A
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
EC
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1237, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C
SEF058Y
With GST F

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004B0
TBWM1345E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L/W E
PBIB1104E F
0 - 14V

G
5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004B1
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K


OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

4. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

[VK45DE]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R EC
C
Refer to EC-811, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" . E

[VK45DE]
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
Description NBS004AP
NOTE:
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or P2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100
or P2119. Refer to EC-1234, "DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" or EC-1252,
"DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" .
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004AQ

P2101 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
2101 performance problem ate properly. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004AR
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine
is running.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004AS
EC
TBWM1344E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L/W
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004AT

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I A
EC
Battery voltage C
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. D
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II E

F
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
I
K
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1171E

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

8. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .

[VK45DE]
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
tor. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C

actuator terminal
D
5 Should exist
1
4 Should not exist
PBIB3232E
5 Should not exist E
2
4 Should exist

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
G
1. Remove the intake air duct. H
and the housing.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 12.
control actuator inside. J
K
PBIB3247E
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR L

OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004AU

step.
PBIB3251E
Removal and Installation NBS004AV


[VK45DE]
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description NBS004B2
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004B3 C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator E
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE F
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return G
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004B4

H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. J
K
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004B5
TBWM1346E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L/W E
PBIB1104E F
0 - 14V

G
5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004B6

Refer to EC-818, "Ground Inspection" . L
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
tor.
actuator terminal
5 Should exist
1
4 Should not exist
PBIB3232E
5 Should not exist
2
4 Should exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004B7

step.
PBIB3251E

[VK45DE]
Removal and Installation NBS004B8
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

EC

[VK45DE]
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
Component Description NBS004AL
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004AM
This self-diagnosis has one trip detection logic.

Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion.
P2119 Electric throttle control
2119 actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B)
not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004AN
NOTE:
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
ON.
SEF058Y
With GST

[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II A
EC
C
SEF058Y
E
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004AO
F

1. Remove the intake air duct. G
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing.
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. I
J
PBIB3247E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K

2. Perform EC-744, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . L
>> INSPECTION END M

[VK45DE]
Component Description NBS004FR
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004FS


ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004FT

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
P2122 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen- ● Harness or connectors
tion sensor 1 circuit low
2122 sor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
input
shorted.)
P2123 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
2123 sor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1)
input
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004FU
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004FV
TBWM1354E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor ground [Engine is running] C
D
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
E
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
91 G
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F

G
98 Y/R
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.40V H
● Engine stopped 0.5 - 1.0V I
106 OR
Engine stopped
J
● 3.9 - 4.7V
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004FW K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
M
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector.
PBIB1548E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E

● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[VK45DE]
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
● Harness connectors E211, M41 E
F
8. CHECK APP SENSOR

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. H
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY I

J
K
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END M
Component Inspection NBS004FX

conditions.

MBIB0023E

[VK45DE]
Removal and Installation NBS004FY
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

[VK45DE]
A
Component Description NBS004FZ

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004G0
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004G1 J

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Harness or connectors
P2127 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
tion sensor 2 circuit low (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
input shorted.) L
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2128 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- (APP sensor 2)
2128 sor 2 is sent to ECM. M
input ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004G2
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004G3
EC
TBWM1355E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 Y/R
106 OR
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004G4

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
connector.
D
PBIB1548E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0915E H
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
L
M
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

[VK45DE]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.


[VK45DE]
12. CHECK APP SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. EC
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY C

D
E
>> INSPECTION END
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F

G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS004G5
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR H

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- I
conditions.
J

sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V K
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V L
MBIB0023E

6. Perform EC-744, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . M
Removal and Installation NBS004G6
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
Component Description NBS004G7

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004G8

On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004G9

(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P2135
circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 ● Electric throttle control actuator
mance problem and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004GA
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004GB
TBWM1356E

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped D
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor) G
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped H
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON] I
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed J
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
K
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004GC

L
M
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
tor.
PBIB3232E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3250E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 and ECM terminal 66. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
Refer to EC-1274, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. M

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004GD
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.

69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

step.
Removal and Installation NBS004GE


[VK45DE]
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description NBS004GF

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004GG
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004GH J

NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to K
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
Accelerator pedal posi- shorted.)
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
M
P2138 tion sensor circuit
compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 range/performance ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
and APP sensor 2.
problem (APP sensor 1 and 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004GI
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004GJ
EC
TBWM1357E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 Y/R
106 OR
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004GK

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
connector.
D
PBIB1548E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0914E H

J
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K

2. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0915E

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 1 EC
and ECM terminal 83.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
E
● Harness connectors E211, M41 F
G
12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 2.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
K
M
14. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

[VK45DE]
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004GL

conditions.

MBIB0023E

Removal and Installation NBS004GM
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

[VK45DE]
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693
A
Component Description NBS004LP
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a EC
C
< air).
E
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to F
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004LQ

I
J
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic NBS004LR

K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be
shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
P2A00 ● The output voltage computed by ECM from the ● A/F sensor 1
2A00 A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side ● A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 for a specified period. M
● Fuel pressure
P2A03 circuit range/performance ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
2A03 sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a ● Fuel injector
(Bank 2) specified period. ● Intake air leaks

[VK45DE]
DTC Confirmation Procedure NBS004LS
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
utes.
dure" .
SEF968Y
WITH GST
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. PBIB3230E
utes.

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004LT
BANK 1 A
EC
TBWM1373E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

[VK45DE]
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWM1374E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004LU

PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VK45DE]
1. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
EC
PBIB3239E
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) E
harness connector
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 5. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 6. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector F
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)

G
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK H

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. J

[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.

[VK45DE]
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR A
EC
PBIB3246E
E

F
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
H
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
Voltage: Battery voltage J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. K
NG >> GO TO 7.
L
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

[VK45DE]
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

[VK45DE]
11. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 A
CAUTION:
● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a EC
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. C
>> GO TO 12.
D
E
F
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 13.
G
H
PBIB3202E
13. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.

I
With CONSULT-II
J
with CONSULT-II.
K
M
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
>> GO TO 14. PBIB3230E

[VK45DE]
>> INSPECTION END
PBIB3202E
Removal and Installation NBS004LV


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Component Description NBS004HM

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of EC
Refer to EC-696, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
C
PBIB2558E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004HN

G

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004HO
TBWM1365E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Approximately 0V
108 SB ASCD brake switch E
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004HP F

With CONSULT-II G
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. H
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
K
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
L
M
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
PBIB1537E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
PBIB2558E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
K
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

PBIB2558E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. E

>> INSPECTION END

G
Component Inspection NBS004HQ
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions. I
J
4. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. K
PBIB1536E
L
STOP LAMP SWITCH
M
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist
PBIB1535E

ASCD INDICATOR
[VK45DE]
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
Component Description NBS004HR
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE lamp illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET lamp illuminates when following conditions are met.
● CRUISE lamp is illuminated.
● SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of
ASCD setting.
SET lamp remains lit during ASCD control.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004HS
Specification data are reference value.

MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89 MPH)

ASCD INDICATOR
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004HT
EC
TBWM1366E

ASCD INDICATOR
[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004HU

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st
time → at the 2nd time

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF
and 144 km/h (89 MPH)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-819, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-34, "DTC [B2202] Meter Communication Circuit" .

>> INSPECTION END

[VK45DE]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
A
Description NBS004HE
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004HF

C
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON D
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and light-
OFF
ing switch: OFF
E
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan switch: ON ON
HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
F
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004HG
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

1. Turn ignition switch ON. G
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
H
conditions.
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON I
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
K
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions. L
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
M
Lighting switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0103E

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following
conditions.
Heater fan control switch: ON ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1995E
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-67, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
>> INSPECTION END
5. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-7, "HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -" .
>> INSPECTION END
6. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM

Refer to ATC-40, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
[VK45DE]
FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
A
Component Description NBS004GY
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec- EC
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains C
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
D
SEF375Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004GZ

G
● No load
H

FUEL INJECTOR
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004H0
TBWM1362E

FUEL INJECTOR
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
E
at idle
PBIB0042E
41 BR Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE F
(11 - 14V)
63 G Fuel injector No. 8 [Engine is running]
G
H
PBIB0043E
I
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004H1
1. INSPECTION START
J
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No K
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 3.
L
With CONSULT-II M
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0133E

FUEL INJECTOR
[VK45DE]
2. Disconnect harness connector F21, F201 (bank 1) and F41, F221 (bank 2).
PBIB3248E

1 F21 terminal 3 23
3 F21 terminal 2 22
5 F21 terminal 1 21
7 F21 terminal 6 44
2 F41 terminal 3 42
4 F41 terminal 2 41
6 F41 terminal 1 40
8 F41 terminal 6 63

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

FUEL INJECTOR
[VK45DE]
● Harness connectors F21, F201 EC
C
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between harness connector F21 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between harness connector F41 and fuse D
E
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II F

G
terminal
(+) (–)
1 3 H
3 2
F201 5
5 1
I
7 6
PBIB2449E
2 3
4 2 J
F221 5
6 1
8 6
K
OK or NG
L
NG >> GO TO 6.

FUEL INJECTOR
[VK45DE]
6. CHECK SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors.
PBIB3235E
: Vehicle front 1. Fuel injector (bank 2) 2. Fuel injector (bank 1)
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Harness connector terminal Fuel injector terminal
F201 terminal 1
F201 terminal 2
2
F201 terminal 3
F201 terminal 6
F201 terminal 5 1
F221 terminal 1
F221 terminal 2
2
F221 terminal 3
F221 terminal 6
F221 terminal 5 1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace fuel injector.

>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004H2
FUEL INJECTOR A
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
EC
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E
E
Removal and Installation NBS004H3
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-194, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . F

FUEL PUMP
[VK45DE]
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
Description NBS004H4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
PBIB1508E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004H5

● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch: ON
ON
● Except above OFF

FUEL PUMP
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004H6
EC
TBWM1363E

FUEL PUMP
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004H7

2. Pinch fuel feed hose (1) with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3245E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E

FUEL PUMP
[VK45DE]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
NG >> GO TO 11.
E
PBIB1926E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

● Harness connectors E211, M41 G
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

I
3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- J
nector.
K
PBIB1507E M
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 sec-
ond after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0795E

FUEL PUMP
[VK45DE]
6. CHECK 15A FUSE
3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” termi-
nal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Harness connectors E206, B6
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connectors.
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .

FUEL PUMP
[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004H8
FUEL PUMP A
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
terminals 1 and 3. EC

C
SEC918C
E
Removal and Installation NBS004H9
FUEL PUMP

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
ICC BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description NBS004HH
When depress on the brake pedal, ICC brake switch is turned OFF
and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the
brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
PBIB2558E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004HI


(ICC brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF


ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004HJ
EC
TBWM1364E

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
108 SB ICC brake switch
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004HK

With CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
With CONSULT-II
EC
SEC013D
E
Without CONSULT-II
lowing conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
G
PBIB1537E
I
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12. J

Refer to ACS-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
4. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
PBIB1531E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1538E
5. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

PBIB2558E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0857E

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
● 10A fuse EC
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake switch. I
J
3. Check harness continuity between ICC brake hold relay terminal 4 and ECM terminal 108. K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
M
NG >> GO TO 10.


OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ICC brake fold relay.

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
PBIB2558E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.


ICC BRAKE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
16. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. EC

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NBS004HL
ICC BRAKE SWITCH E

3. Check continuity between ICC brake switch terminals 1 and 2 F
G
4. If NG, adjust ICC brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, H

PBIB1536E
I
STOP LAMP SWITCH

under the following conditions. K
L
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. M
PBIB1535E


No current supply

MBIB0063E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Component Description NBS004GT
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
PBIB3234E
: Vehicle front 1. Ignition coil 2. Ignition coil

(with power transistor) (with power transistor)
(bank 2) (bank 1)

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004GU
EC
TBWM1359E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 R/B (11 - 14V)

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
EC
TBWM1360E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
46 BR Ignition signal No. 7 at idle
PBIB0044E
60 SB Ignition signal No. 5
0.1 - 0.4V
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1
[Engine is running]
PBIB0045E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
EC
TBWM1361E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
65 P Ignition signal No. 8 at idle
PBIB0044E
79 LG Ignition signal No. 6
0.1 - 0.4V
81 G Ignition signal No. 2
[Engine is running]
PBIB0045E
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004GV
1. CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
EC
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62,
65, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below. C
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
D
E
PBIB2094E
PBIB0044E
OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 10.
G
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. H
Voltage: Battery voltage I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-812, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- J
CUIT" .
K
MBIB0034E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect condenser (1) harness connector.
– Vehicle front
PBIB3233E
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-812, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-1339, "Component Inspection" E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser. F
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

G
H
PBIB3234E K
: Vehicle front 1. Ignition coil 2. Ignition coil
(with power transistor) (with power transistor)
(bank 2) (bank 1) L
4. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
● Harness connector F49
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F49
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62, 65, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal
1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
Component Inspection NBS004GW
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR A

CAUTION:
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
C
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3 D
Except 0
2 and 3
4. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor. E
6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. PBIB0847E
F
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres- G
8. Start engine.
9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel H
pressure.
11. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- I

checked. J
13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm K
16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark L
portion.
Spark should be generated. M
CAUTION:
NOTE:
17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VK45DE]
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation NBS004GX

Refer to EM-191, "IGNITION COIL" .

[VK45DE]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
A
Component Description NBS004HA
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume EC
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
C
PBIB1492E
H
PBIB2657E

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004HB
TBWM0265E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sor)
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
[Engine is running] E
● Both A/C switch and blower fan motor
switch: ON (Compressor operates) F
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004HC
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION G

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
H
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V I
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. J
K
PBIB1188E

L
1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
3. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. M
PBIB2195E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
PBIB1492E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0188E

5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VK45DE]
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
D
● Harness connectors E17, F47 E
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. H
Removal and Installation NBS004HD
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR I

Refer to ATC-154, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
J

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
SNOW MODE SWITCH PFP:25130
Description NBS004HV
The snow mode switch signal is sent to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” from the snow mode switch. The
“unified meter and A/C amp.” then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line.
The snow mode is used for driving or starting the vehicle on snowy roads or slippery areas. If the snow mode
is activated, the vehicle speed will not be accelerated immediately than your original pedal in due to avoid the
vehicle slip. In other words, ECM controls the rapid engine torque change by controlling the electric throttle
control actuator operating speed.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode NBS004HW


SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004HX
EC
TBWM1369E

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004HY
1. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITICH OVERALL FUNCTION-I

2. Select “SNOW MODE SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check “SNOW MODE SW” indication under the following condi-
tions.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITICH OVERALL FUNCTION-II

2. Start engine.
3. Check the snow indicator lamp under the following condition.
CONDITION INDICATOR LAMP
Snow mode switch: ON Illuminated
Snow mode switch: OFF Not illuminated
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-28, "UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP" .
4. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect snow mode switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between snow mode switch terminal 1 and
Voltage: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB2562E

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between snow mode switch and fuse. EC
C
6. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between snow mode switch terminal 4 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” termi-
nal 12. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
I
PBIB2195E
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. M
8. CHECK SNOW MODE INDICATOR LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between snow mode switch terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

SNOW MODE SWITCH
[VK45DE]
9. CHECK SNOW MODE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace snow mode switch.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004HZ
SNOW MODE SWITCH

Snow mode switch: ON Should exist
Snow mode switch: OFF Should not exist
2. If NG, replace snow mode switch.
PBIB2563E

1 Should exist
2 Should not exist
4. If NG, replace snow mode switch.
PBIB2564E

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
[VK45DE]
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS) PFP:14956
A
Description NBS004GN
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
Throttle position sensor Throttle position VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
D
Battery Battery voltage*
*: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. E
PBIB1876E
K
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the
effective suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port
including the intake valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suc-
tion efficiency and higher torque generation. L
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the
signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power
valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector. M
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided indepen-
dently for each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction
resistance under high speeds.
The power valve is always open regardless of the engine speed when gear position is in N or P.

[VK45DE]
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control sys-
tem. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuator (1) operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank.
The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control sole-
noid valve.
● : Vehicle front
PBIB3237E
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve

The VIAS control solenoid valve (1) cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
● Vacuum tank (2)
PBIB3236E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NBS004GO

ON
VIAS S/V
OFF

[VK45DE]
Wiring Diagram NBS004GP
EC
TBWM1370E

[VK45DE]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V

[VK45DE]
Diagnostic Procedure NBS004GQ
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
C
PBIB0844E
F
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and make sure
that power valve actuator (1) rod moves.
I
PBIB3249E
Without CONSULT-II J
1. Lift up the vehicle.
3. Make sure that power valve actuator (1) rod moves when chang- K
ing the gear position to N and D alternately.
PBIB3249E
OK or NG
NG (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
NG (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.

[VK45DE]
2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check
vacuum existence under the following conditions.
VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum
ON Should exist.
OFF Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. PBIB0844E
NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE

Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
– Vacuum tank (2)
PBIB3236E
4. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve

terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition Vacuum
12V direct current supply Should exist
No supply Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0845E

[VK45DE]
4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE A
1. Stop engine.
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power
valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or dis- EC
connection. Refer to EC-768, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. C
NG >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L
E
5. CHECK VACUUM TANK
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace vacuum tank. G
6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
– Vacuum tank (2)
3. Turn ignition switch ON. I
K
PBIB3236E
4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1 L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB0173E

[VK45DE]
● 10A fuse
● Harness continuity between IPDM E/R and VIAS control solenoid valve
8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection NBS004GR

With CONSULT-II
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
VIAS SOL VALVE between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
PBIB0177E

[VK45DE]
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol- A
lowing conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition EC
between A and B between A and C
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
C
No supply No Yes

MEC488B
D
VACUUM TANK
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. E
2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum tank.
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B.
F
PBIB0846E
Removal and Installation NBS004GS

I
J

[VK45DE]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
Wiring Diagram NBS004I0
TBWM1367E

[VK45DE]
EC
TBWM1368E

[VK45DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
Fuel Pressure NBS004I1
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NBS004I2
Target idle speed No load* (in P or N position) 650±50 rpm

Air conditioner: ON In P or N position 700 rpm or more
Ignition timing In P or N position 12° ± 5° BTDC
*: Under the following conditions:
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value NBS004I3
Condition Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

At idle 14.0 - 33.0
At 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0
Mass Air Flow Sensor NBS004I4
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.3V*
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor NBS004I5

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor NBS004I6

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor NBS004I7

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) NBS004I8

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) NBS004I9

A/F Sensor 1 Heater NBS004LW

[VK45DE]
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater NBS004IB
A
Throttle Control Motor NBS004IC
EC
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector NBS004ID
C
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 13.5 - 17.5Ω
Fuel Pump NBS004IE

D

[VK45DE]

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Revision: 2006 December EC-1 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-2 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-3 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-4 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-5 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-6 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-7 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-8 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-9 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-10 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-11 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-12 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-13 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-14 2006 FX35/FX45

U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-156 E

Revision: 2006 December EC-15 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-16 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-17 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-18 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-19 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-20 2006 FX35/FX45

ICC COMMAND VALUE*6 P1568 1568 EC-528

LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 AT-162

Revision: 2006 December EC-21 2006 FX35/FX45

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 AT-118

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 EC-466

Revision: 2006 December EC-22 2006 FX35/FX45

● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

Revision: 2006 December EC-23 2006 FX35/FX45

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

Revision: 2006 December EC-24 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-25 2006 FX35/FX45

● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

Revision: 2006 December EC-26 2006 FX35/FX45

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick

(J-44626) Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor

(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Revision: 2006 December EC-27 2006 FX35/FX45

KV109E0010 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

KV109E0080 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

Revision: 2006 December EC-28 2006 FX35/FX45

Leak detector Locating EVAP leak EC

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads K

Revision: 2006 December EC-29 2006 FX35/FX45

System Diagram NBS003L1

Revision: 2006 December EC-30 2006 FX35/FX45

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2

VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION

Revision: 2006 December EC-31 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December EC-32 2006 FX35/FX45